trans. Benjamin Jowett

← previous · Plato · next → · Historical Works


Timaeus

  by Plato

  Translated by Benjamin Jowett

Timaeus

Introduction and Analysis

  Of all the writings of Plato the Timaeus is the most obscure and
  repulsive to the modern reader, and has nevertheless had the
  greatest influence over the ancient and mediaeval world. The
  obscurity arises in the infancy of physical science, out of the
  confusion of theological, mathematical, and physiological
  notions, out of the desire to conceive the whole of nature
  without any adequate knowledge of the parts, and from a greater
  perception of similarities which lie on the surface than of
  differences which are hidden from view. To bring sense under the
  control of reason; to find some way through the mist or labyrinth
  of appearances, either the highway of mathematics, or more
  devious paths suggested by the analogy of man with the world, and
  of the world with man; to see that all things have a cause and
  are tending towards an end—this is the spirit of the ancient
  physical philosopher. He has no notion of trying an experiment
  and is hardly capable of observing the curiosities of nature
  which are ‘tumbling out at his feet,’ or of interpreting even the
  most obvious of them. He is driven back from the nearer to the
  more distant, from particulars to generalities, from the earth to
  the stars. He lifts up his eyes to the heavens and seeks to guide
  by their motions his erring footsteps. But we neither appreciate
  the conditions of knowledge to which he was subjected, nor have
  the ideas which fastened upon his imagination the same hold upon
  us. For he is hanging between matter and mind; he is under the
  dominion at the same time both of sense and of abstractions; his
  impressions are taken almost at random from the outside of
  nature; he sees the light, but not the objects which are revealed
  by the light; and he brings into juxtaposition things which to us
  appear wide as the poles asunder, because he finds nothing
  between them. He passes abruptly from persons to ideas and
  numbers, and from ideas and numbers to persons,—from the heavens
  to man, from astronomy to physiology; he confuses, or rather does
  not distinguish, subject and object, first and final causes, and
  is dreaming of geometrical figures lost in a flux of sense. He
  contrasts the perfect movements of the heavenly bodies with the
  imperfect representation of them (Rep.), and he does not always
  require strict accuracy even in applications of number and figure
  (Rep.). His mind lingers around the forms of mythology, which he
  uses as symbols or translates into figures of speech. He has no
  implements of observation, such as the telescope or microscope;
  the great science of chemistry is a blank to him. It is only by
  an effort that the modern thinker can breathe the atmosphere of
  the ancient philosopher, or understand how, under such unequal
  conditions, he seems in many instances, by a sort of inspiration,
  to have anticipated the truth.

  The influence with the Timaeus has exercised upon posterity is
  due partly to a misunderstanding. In the supposed depths of this
  dialogue the Neo-Platonists found hidden meanings and connections
  with the Jewish and Christian Scriptures, and out of them they
  elicited doctrines quite at variance with the spirit of Plato.
  Believing that he was inspired by the Holy Ghost, or had received
  his wisdom from Moses, they seemed to find in his writings the
  Christian Trinity, the Word, the Church, the creation of the
  world in a Jewish sense, as they really found the personality of
  God or of mind, and the immortality of the soul. All religions
  and philosophies met and mingled in the schools of Alexandria,
  and the Neo-Platonists had a method of interpretation which could
  elicit any meaning out of any words. They were really incapable
  of distinguishing between the opinions of one philosopher and
  another— between Aristotle and Plato, or between the serious
  thoughts of Plato and his passing fancies. They were absorbed in
  his theology and were under the dominion of his name, while that
  which was truly great and truly characteristic in him, his effort
  to realize and connect abstractions, was not understood by them
  at all. Yet the genius of Plato and Greek philosophy reacted upon
  the East, and a Greek element of thought and language overlaid
  and partly reduced to order the chaos of Orientalism. And kindred
  spirits, like St. Augustine, even though they were acquainted
  with his writings only through the medium of a Latin translation,
  were profoundly affected by them, seeming to find ‘God and his
  word everywhere insinuated’ in them (August. Confess.)

  There is no danger of the modern commentators on the Timaeus
  falling into the absurdities of the Neo-Platonists. In the
  present day we are well aware that an ancient philosopher is to
  be interpreted from himself and by the contemporary history of
  thought. We know that mysticism is not criticism. The fancies of
  the Neo-Platonists are only interesting to us because they
  exhibit a phase of the human mind which prevailed widely in the
  first centuries of the Christian era, and is not wholly extinct
  in our own day. But they have nothing to do with the
  interpretation of Plato, and in spirit they are opposed to him.
  They are the feeble expression of an age which has lost the power
  not only of creating great works, but of understanding them. They
  are the spurious birth of a marriage between philosophy and
  tradition, between Hellas and the East—(Greek) (Rep.). Whereas
  the so-called mysticism of Plato is purely Greek, arising out of
  his imperfect knowledge and high aspirations, and is the growth
  of an age in which philosophy is not wholly separated from poetry
  and mythology.

  A greater danger with modern interpreters of Plato is the
  tendency to regard the Timaeus as the centre of his system. We do
  not know how Plato would have arranged his own dialogues, or
  whether the thought of arranging any of them, besides the two
  ‘Trilogies’ which he has expressly connected; was ever present to
  his mind. But, if he had arranged them, there are many
  indications that this is not the place which he would have
  assigned to the Timaeus. We observe, first of all, that the
  dialogue is put into the mouth of a Pythagorean philosopher, and
  not of Socrates. And this is required by dramatic propriety; for
  the investigation of nature was expressly renounced by Socrates
  in the Phaedo. Nor does Plato himself attribute any importance to
  his guesses at science. He is not at all absorbed by them, as he
  is by the IDEA of good. He is modest and hesitating, and
  confesses that his words partake of the uncertainty of the
  subject (Tim.). The dialogue is primarily concerned with the
  animal creation, including under this term the heavenly bodies,
  and with man only as one among the animals. But we can hardly
  suppose that Plato would have preferred the study of nature to
  man, or that he would have deemed the formation of the world and
  the human frame to have the same interest which he ascribes to
  the mystery of being and not-being, or to the great political
  problems which he discusses in the Republic and the Laws. There
  are no speculations on physics in the other dialogues of Plato,
  and he himself regards the consideration of them as a rational
  pastime only. He is beginning to feel the need of further
  divisions of knowledge; and is becoming aware that besides
  dialectic, mathematics, and the arts, there is another field
  which has been hitherto unexplored by him. But he has not as yet
  defined this intermediate territory which lies somewhere between
  medicine and mathematics, and he would have felt that there was
  as great an impiety in ranking theories of physics first in the
  order of knowledge, as in placing the body before the soul.

  It is true, however, that the Timaeus is by no means confined to
  speculations on physics. The deeper foundations of the Platonic
  philosophy, such as the nature of God, the distinction of the
  sensible and intellectual, the great original conceptions of time
  and space, also appear in it. They are found principally in the
  first half of the dialogue. The construction of the heavens is
  for the most part ideal; the cyclic year serves as the connection
  between the world of absolute being and of generation, just as
  the number of population in the Republic is the expression or
  symbol of the transition from the ideal to the actual state. In
  some passages we are uncertain whether we are reading a
  description of astronomical facts or contemplating processes of
  the human mind, or of that divine mind (Phil.) which in Plato is
  hardly separable from it. The characteristics of man are
  transferred to the world-animal, as for example when intelligence
  and knowledge are said to be perfected by the circle of the Same,
  and true opinion by the circle of the Other; and conversely the
  motions of the world-animal reappear in man; its amorphous state
  continues in the child, and in both disorder and chaos are
  gradually succeeded by stability and order. It is not however to
  passages like these that Plato is referring when he speaks of the
  uncertainty of his subject, but rather to the composition of
  bodies, to the relations of colours, the nature of diseases, and
  the like, about which he truly feels the lamentable ignorance
  prevailing in his own age.

  We are led by Plato himself to regard the Timaeus, not as the
  centre or inmost shrine of the edifice, but as a detached
  building in a different style, framed, not after the Socratic,
  but after some Pythagorean model. As in the Cratylus and
  Parmenides, we are uncertain whether Plato is expressing his own
  opinions, or appropriating and perhaps improving the
  philosophical speculations of others. In all three dialogues he
  is exerting his dramatic and imitative power; in the Cratylus
  mingling a satirical and humorous purpose with true principles of
  language; in the Parmenides overthrowing Megarianism by a sort of
  ultra-Megarianism, which discovers contradictions in the one as
  great as those which have been previously shown to exist in the
  ideas. There is a similar uncertainty about the Timaeus; in the
  first part he scales the heights of transcendentalism, in the
  latter part he treats in a bald and superficial manner of the
  functions and diseases of the human frame. He uses the thoughts
  and almost the words of Parmenides when he discourses of being
  and of essence, adopting from old religion into philosophy the
  conception of God, and from the Megarians the IDEA of good. He
  agrees with Empedocles and the Atomists in attributing the
  greater differences of kinds to the figures of the elements and
  their movements into and out of one another. With Heracleitus, he
  acknowledges the perpetual flux; like Anaxagoras, he asserts the
  predominance of mind, although admitting an element of necessity
  which reason is incapable of subduing; like the Pythagoreans he
  supposes the mystery of the world to be contained in number.
  Many, if not all the elements of the Pre-Socratic philosophy are
  included in the Timaeus. It is a composite or eclectic work of
  imagination, in which Plato, without naming them, gathers up into
  a kind of system the various elements of philosophy which
  preceded him.

  If we allow for the difference of subject, and for some growth in
  Plato’s own mind, the discrepancy between the Timaeus and the
  other dialogues will not appear to be great. It is probable that
  the relation of the ideas to God or of God to the world was
  differently conceived by him at different times of his life. In
  all his later dialogues we observe a tendency in him to personify
  mind or God, and he therefore naturally inclines to view creation
  as the work of design. The creator is like a human artist who
  frames in his mind a plan which he executes by the help of his
  servants. Thus the language of philosophy which speaks of first
  and second causes is crossed by another sort of phraseology: ‘God
  made the world because he was good, and the demons ministered to
  him.’ The Timaeus is cast in a more theological and less
  philosophical mould than the other dialogues, but the same
  general spirit is apparent; there is the same dualism or
  opposition between the ideal and actual—the soul is prior to the
  body, the intelligible and unseen to the visible and corporeal.
  There is the same distinction between knowledge and opinion which
  occurs in the Theaetetus and Republic, the same enmity to the
  poets, the same combination of music and gymnastics. The doctrine
  of transmigration is still held by him, as in the Phaedrus and
  Republic; and the soul has a view of the heavens in a prior state
  of being. The ideas also remain, but they have become types in
  nature, forms of men, animals, birds, fishes. And the attribution
  of evil to physical causes accords with the doctrine which he
  maintains in the Laws respecting the involuntariness of vice.

  The style and plan of the Timaeus differ greatly from that of any
  other of the Platonic dialogues. The language is weighty, abrupt,
  and in some passages sublime. But Plato has not the same mastery
  over his instrument which he exhibits in the Phaedrus or
  Symposium. Nothing can exceed the beauty or art of the
  introduction, in which he is using words after his accustomed
  manner. But in the rest of the work the power of language seems
  to fail him, and the dramatic form is wholly given up. He could
  write in one style, but not in another, and the Greek language
  had not as yet been fashioned by any poet or philosopher to
  describe physical phenomena. The early physiologists had
  generally written in verse; the prose writers, like Democritus
  and Anaxagoras, as far as we can judge from their fragments,
  never attained to a periodic style. And hence we find the same
  sort of clumsiness in the Timaeus of Plato which characterizes
  the philosophical poem of Lucretius. There is a want of flow and
  often a defect of rhythm; the meaning is sometimes obscure, and
  there is a greater use of apposition and more of repetition than
  occurs in Plato’s earlier writings. The sentences are less
  closely connected and also more involved; the antecedents of
  demonstrative and relative pronouns are in some cases remote and
  perplexing. The greater frequency of participles and of absolute
  constructions gives the effect of heaviness. The descriptive
  portion of the Timaeus retains traces of the first Greek prose
  composition; for the great master of language was speaking on a
  theme with which he was imperfectly acquainted, and had no words
  in which to express his meaning. The rugged grandeur of the
  opening discourse of Timaeus may be compared with the more
  harmonious beauty of a similar passage in the Phaedrus.

  To the same cause we may attribute the want of plan. Plato had
  not the command of his materials which would have enabled him to
  produce a perfect work of art. Hence there are several new
  beginnings and resumptions and formal or artificial connections;
  we miss the ‘callida junctura’ of the earlier dialogues. His
  speculations about the Eternal, his theories of creation, his
  mathematical anticipations, are supplemented by desultory remarks
  on the one immortal and the two mortal souls of man, on the
  functions of the bodily organs in health and disease, on sight,
  hearing, smell, taste, and touch. He soars into the heavens, and
  then, as if his wings were suddenly clipped, he walks
  ungracefully and with difficulty upon the earth. The greatest
  things in the world, and the least things in man, are brought
  within the compass of a short treatise. But the intermediate
  links are missing, and we cannot be surprised that there should
  be a want of unity in a work which embraces astronomy, theology,
  physiology, and natural philosophy in a few pages.

  It is not easy to determine how Plato’s cosmos may be presented
  to the reader in a clearer and shorter form; or how we may supply
  a thread of connexion to his ideas without giving greater
  consistency to them than they possessed in his mind, or adding on
  consequences which would never have occurred to him. For he has
  glimpses of the truth, but no comprehensive or perfect vision.
  There are isolated expressions about the nature of God which have
  a wonderful depth and power; but we are not justified in assuming
  that these had any greater significance to the mind of Plato than
  language of a neutral and impersonal character... With a view to
  the illustration of the Timaeus I propose to divide this
  Introduction into sections, of which the first will contain an
  outline of the dialogue: (2) I shall consider the aspects of
  nature which presented themselves to Plato and his age, and the
  elements of philosophy which entered into the conception of them:
  (3) the theology and physics of the Timaeus, including the soul
  of the world, the conception of time and space, and the
  composition of the elements: (4) in the fourth section I shall
  consider the Platonic astronomy, and the position of the earth.
  There will remain, (5) the psychology, (6) the physiology of
  Plato, and (7) his analysis of the senses to be briefly commented
  upon: (8) lastly, we may examine in what points Plato approaches
  or anticipates the discoveries of modern science.

Section 1

  Socrates begins the Timaeus with a summary of the Republic. He
  lightly touches upon a few points,—the division of labour and
  distribution of the citizens into classes, the double nature and
  training of the guardians, the community of property and of women
  and children. But he makes no mention of the second education, or
  of the government of philosophers.

  And now he desires to see the ideal State set in motion; he would
  like to know how she behaved in some great struggle. But he is
  unable to invent such a narrative himself; and he is afraid that
  the poets are equally incapable; for, although he pretends to
  have nothing to say against them, he remarks that they are a
  tribe of imitators, who can only describe what they have seen.
  And he fears that the Sophists, who are plentifully supplied with
  graces of speech, in their erratic way of life having never had a
  city or house of their own, may through want of experience err in
  their conception of philosophers and statesmen. ‘And therefore to
  you I turn, Timaeus, citizen of Locris, who are at once a
  philosopher and a statesman, and to you, Critias, whom all
  Athenians know to be similarly accomplished, and to Hermocrates,
  who is also fitted by nature and education to share in our
  discourse.’

  HERMOCRATES: ‘We will do our best, and have been already
  preparing; for on our way home, Critias told us of an ancient
  tradition, which I wish, Critias, that you would repeat to
  Socrates.’ ‘I will, if Timaeus approves.’ ‘I approve.’ Listen
  then, Socrates, to a tale of Solon’s, who, being the friend of
  Dropidas my great-grandfather, told it to my grandfather Critias,
  and he told me. The narrative related to ancient famous actions
  of the Athenian people, and to one especially, which I will
  rehearse in honour of you and of the goddess. Critias when he
  told this tale of the olden time, was ninety years old, I being
  not more than ten. The occasion of the rehearsal was the day of
  the Apaturia called the Registration of Youth, at which our
  parents gave prizes for recitation. Some poems of Solon were
  recited by the boys. They had not at that time gone out of
  fashion, and the recital of them led some one to say, perhaps in
  compliment to Critias, that Solon was not only the wisest of men
  but also the best of poets. The old man brightened up at hearing
  this, and said: Had Solon only had the leisure which was required
  to complete the famous legend which he brought with him from
  Egypt he would have been as distinguished as Homer and Hesiod.
  ‘And what was the subject of the poem?’ said the person who made
  the remark. The subject was a very noble one; he described the
  most famous action in which the Athenian people were ever
  engaged. But the memory of their exploits has passed away owing
  to the lapse of time and the extinction of the actors. ‘Tell us,’
  said the other, ‘the whole story, and where Solon heard the
  story.’ He replied—There is at the head of the Egyptian Delta,
  where the river Nile divides, a city and district called Sais;
  the city was the birthplace of King Amasis, and is under the
  protection of the goddess Neith or Athene. The citizens have a
  friendly feeling towards the Athenians, believing themselves to
  be related to them. Hither came Solon, and was received with
  honour; and here he first learnt, by conversing with the Egyptian
  priests, how ignorant he and his countrymen were of antiquity.
  Perceiving this, and with the view of eliciting information from
  them, he told them the tales of Phoroneus and Niobe, and also of
  Deucalion and Pyrrha, and he endeavoured to count the generations
  which had since passed. Thereupon an aged priest said to him: ‘O
  Solon, Solon, you Hellenes are ever young, and there is no old
  man who is a Hellene.’ ‘What do you mean?’ he asked. ‘In mind,’
  replied the priest, ‘I mean to say that you are children; there
  is no opinion or tradition of knowledge among you which is white
  with age; and I will tell you why. Like the rest of mankind you
  have suffered from convulsions of nature, which are chiefly
  brought about by the two great agencies of fire and water. The
  former is symbolized in the Hellenic tale of young Phaethon who
  drove his father’s horses the wrong way, and having burnt up the
  earth was himself burnt up by a thunderbolt. For there occurs at
  long intervals a derangement of the heavenly bodies, and then the
  earth is destroyed by fire. At such times, and when fire is the
  agent, those who dwell by rivers or on the seashore are safer
  than those who dwell upon high and dry places, who in their turn
  are safer when the danger is from water. Now the Nile is our
  saviour from fire, and as there is little rain in Egypt, we are
  not harmed by water; whereas in other countries, when a deluge
  comes, the inhabitants are swept by the rivers into the sea. The
  memorials which your own and other nations have once had of the
  famous actions of mankind perish in the waters at certain
  periods; and the rude survivors in the mountains begin again,
  knowing nothing of the world before the flood. But in Egypt the
  traditions of our own and other lands are by us registered for
  ever in our temples. The genealogies which you have recited to us
  out of your own annals, Solon, are a mere children’s story. For
  in the first place, you remember one deluge only, and there were
  many of them, and you know nothing of that fairest and noblest
  race of which you are a seed or remnant. The memory of them was
  lost, because there was no written voice among you. For in the
  times before the great flood Athens was the greatest and best of
  cities and did the noblest deeds and had the best constitution of
  any under the face of heaven.’ Solon marvelled, and desired to be
  informed of the particulars. ‘You are welcome to hear them,’ said
  the priest, ‘both for your own sake and for that of the city, and
  above all for the sake of the goddess who is the common foundress
  of both our cities. Nine thousand years have elapsed since she
  founded yours, and eight thousand since she founded ours, as our
  annals record. Many laws exist among us which are the counterpart
  of yours as they were in the olden time. I will briefly describe
  them to you, and you shall read the account of them at your
  leisure in the sacred registers. In the first place, there was a
  caste of priests among the ancient Athenians, and another of
  artisans; also castes of shepherds, hunters, and husbandmen, and
  lastly of warriors, who, like the warriors of Egypt, were
  separated from the rest, and carried shields and spears, a custom
  which the goddess first taught you, and then the Asiatics, and we
  among Asiatics first received from her. Observe again, what care
  the law took in the pursuit of wisdom, searching out the deep
  things of the world, and applying them to the use of man. The
  spot of earth which the goddess chose had the best of climates,
  and produced the wisest men; in no other was she herself, the
  philosopher and warrior goddess, so likely to have votaries. And
  there you dwelt as became the children of the gods, excelling all
  men in virtue, and many famous actions are recorded of you. The
  most famous of them all was the overthrow of the island of
  Atlantis. This great island lay over against the Pillars of
  Heracles, in extent greater than Libya and Asia put together, and
  was the passage to other islands and to a great ocean of which
  the Mediterranean sea was only the harbour; and within the
  Pillars the empire of Atlantis reached in Europe to Tyrrhenia and
  in Libya to Egypt. This mighty power was arrayed against Egypt
  and Hellas and all the countries bordering on the Mediterranean.
  Then your city did bravely, and won renown over the whole earth.
  For at the peril of her own existence, and when the other
  Hellenes had deserted her, she repelled the invader, and of her
  own accord gave liberty to all the nations within the Pillars. A
  little while afterwards there were great earthquakes and floods,
  and your warrior race all sank into the earth; and the great
  island of Atlantis also disappeared in the sea. This is the
  explanation of the shallows which are found in that part of the
  Atlantic ocean.’

  Such was the tale, Socrates, which Critias heard from Solon; and
  I noticed when listening to you yesterday, how close the
  resemblance was between your city and citizens and the ancient
  Athenian State. But I would not speak at the time, because I
  wanted to refresh my memory. I had heard the old man when I was a
  child, and though I could not remember the whole of our
  yesterday’s discourse, I was able to recall every word of this,
  which is branded into my mind; and I am prepared, Socrates, to
  rehearse to you the entire narrative. The imaginary State which
  you were describing may be identified with the reality of Solon,
  and our antediluvian ancestors may be your citizens. ‘That is
  excellent, Critias, and very appropriate to a Panathenaic
  festival; the truth of the story is a great advantage.’ Then now
  let me explain to you the order of our entertainment; first,
  Timaeus, who is a natural philosopher, will speak of the origin
  of the world, going down to the creation of man, and then I shall
  receive the men whom he has created, and some of whom will have
  been educated by you, and introduce them to you as the lost
  Athenian citizens of whom the Egyptian record spoke. As the law
  of Solon prescribes, we will bring them into court and
  acknowledge their claims to citizenship. ‘I see,’ replied
  Socrates, ‘that I shall be well entertained; and do you, Timaeus,
  offer up a prayer and begin.’

  TIMAEUS: All men who have any right feeling, at the beginning of
  any enterprise, call upon the Gods; and he who is about to speak
  of the origin of the universe has a special need of their aid.
  May my words be acceptable to them, and may I speak in the manner
  which will be most intelligible to you and will best express my
  own meaning!

  First, I must distinguish between that which always is and never
  becomes and which is apprehended by reason and reflection, and
  that which always becomes and never is and is conceived by
  opinion with the help of sense. All that becomes and is created
  is the work of a cause, and that is fair which the artificer
  makes after an eternal pattern, but whatever is fashioned after a
  created pattern is not fair. Is the world created or
  uncreated?—that is the first question. Created, I reply, being
  visible and tangible and having a body, and therefore sensible;
  and if sensible, then created; and if created, made by a cause,
  and the cause is the ineffable father of all things, who had
  before him an eternal archetype. For to imagine that the
  archetype was created would be blasphemy, seeing that the world
  is the noblest of creations, and God is the best of causes. And
  the world being thus created according to the eternal pattern is
  the copy of something; and we may assume that words are akin to
  the matter of which they speak. What is spoken of the unchanging
  or intelligible must be certain and true; but what is spoken of
  the created image can only be probable; being is to becoming what
  truth is to belief. And amid the variety of opinions which have
  arisen about God and the nature of the world we must be content
  to take probability for our rule, considering that I, who am the
  speaker, and you, who are the judges, are only men; to
  probability we may attain but no further.

  SOCRATES: Excellent, Timaeus, I like your manner of approaching
  the subject—proceed.

  TIMAEUS: Why did the Creator make the world?...He was good, and
  therefore not jealous, and being free from jealousy he desired
  that all things should be like himself. Wherefore he set in order
  the visible world, which he found in disorder. Now he who is the
  best could only create the fairest; and reflecting that of
  visible things the intelligent is superior to the unintelligent,
  he put intelligence in soul and soul in body, and framed the
  universe to be the best and fairest work in the order of nature,
  and the world became a living soul through the providence of God.

  In the likeness of what animal was the world made?—that is the
  third question...The form of the perfect animal was a whole, and
  contained all intelligible beings, and the visible animal, made
  after the pattern of this, included all visible creatures.

  Are there many worlds or one only?—that is the fourth
  question...One only. For if in the original there had been more
  than one they would have been the parts of a third, which would
  have been the true pattern of the world; and therefore there is,
  and will ever be, but one created world. Now that which is
  created is of necessity corporeal and visible and
  tangible,—visible and therefore made of fire,—tangible and
  therefore solid and made of earth. But two terms must be united
  by a third, which is a mean between them; and had the earth been
  a surface only, one mean would have sufficed, but two means are
  required to unite solid bodies. And as the world was composed of
  solids, between the elements of fire and earth God placed two
  other elements of air and water, and arranged them in a
  continuous proportion—

  fire:air::air:water, and air:water::water:earth,

  and so put together a visible and palpable heaven, having harmony
  and friendship in the union of the four elements; and being at
  unity with itself it was indissoluble except by the hand of the
  framer. Each of the elements was taken into the universe whole
  and entire; for he considered that the animal should be perfect
  and one, leaving no remnants out of which another animal could be
  created, and should also be free from old age and disease, which
  are produced by the action of external forces. And as he was to
  contain all things, he was made in the all-containing form of a
  sphere, round as from a lathe and every way equidistant from the
  centre, as was natural and suitable to him. He was finished and
  smooth, having neither eyes nor ears, for there was nothing
  without him which he could see or hear; and he had no need to
  carry food to his mouth, nor was there air for him to breathe;
  and he did not require hands, for there was nothing of which he
  could take hold, nor feet, with which to walk. All that he did
  was done rationally in and by himself, and he moved in a circle
  turning within himself, which is the most intellectual of
  motions; but the other six motions were wanting to him; wherefore
  the universe had no feet or legs.

  And so the thought of God made a God in the image of a perfect
  body, having intercourse with himself and needing no other, but
  in every part harmonious and self-contained and truly blessed.
  The soul was first made by him—the elder to rule the younger; not
  in the order in which our wayward fancy has led us to describe
  them, but the soul first and afterwards the body. God took of the
  unchangeable and indivisible and also of the divisible and
  corporeal, and out of the two he made a third nature, essence,
  which was in a mean between them, and partook of the same and the
  other, the intractable nature of the other being compressed into
  the same. Having made a compound of all the three, he proceeded
  to divide the entire mass into portions related to one another in
  the ratios of 1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 8, 27, and proceeded to fill up the
  double and triple intervals thus—
  • over 1, 4/3, 3/2, - over 2, 8/3, 3, - over 4, 16/3, 6, - over 8:

  • over 1, 3/2, 2, - over 3, 9/2, 6, - over 9, 27/2, 18, - over 27;

    in which double series of numbers are two kinds of means; the one exceeds and is exceeded by equal parts of the extremes, e.g. 1, 4/3, 2; the other kind of mean is one which is equidistant from the extremes—2, 4, 6. In this manner there were formed intervals of thirds, 3:2, of fourths, 4:3, and of ninths, 9:8. And next he filled up the intervals of a fourth with ninths, leaving a remnant which is in the ratio of 256:243. The entire compound was divided by him lengthways into two parts, which he united at the centre like the letter X, and bent into an inner and outer circle or sphere, cutting one another again at a point over against the point at which they cross. The outer circle or sphere was named the sphere of the same—the inner, the sphere of the other or diverse; and the one revolved horizontally to the right, the other diagonally to the left. To the sphere of the same which was undivided he gave dominion, but the sphere of the other or diverse was distributed into seven unequal orbits, having intervals in ratios of twos and threes, three of either sort, and he bade the orbits move in opposite directions to one another—three of them, the Sun, Mercury, Venus, with equal swiftness, and the remaining four—the Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter, with unequal swiftness to the three and to one another, but all in due proportion.

    When the Creator had made the soul he made the body within her; and the soul interfused everywhere from the centre to the circumference of heaven, herself turning in herself, began a divine life of rational and everlasting motion. The body of heaven is visible, but the soul is invisible, and partakes of reason and harmony, and is the best of creations, being the work of the best. And being composed of the same, the other, and the essence, these three, and also divided and bound in harmonical proportion, and revolving within herself—the soul when touching anything which has essence, whether divided or undivided, is stirred to utter the sameness or diversity of that and some other thing, and to tell how and when and where individuals are affected or related, whether in the world of change or of essence. When reason is in the neighbourhood of sense, and the circle of the other or diverse is moving truly, then arise true opinions and beliefs; when reason is in the sphere of thought, and the circle of the same runs smoothly, then intelligence is perfected.

    When the Father who begat the world saw the image which he had made of the Eternal Gods moving and living, he rejoiced; and in his joy resolved, since the archetype was eternal, to make the creature eternal as far as this was possible. Wherefore he made an image of eternity which is time, having an uniform motion according to number, parted into months and days and years, and also having greater divisions of past, present, and future. These all apply to becoming in time, and have no meaning in relation to the eternal nature, which ever is and never was or will be; for the unchangeable is never older or younger, and when we say that he ‘was’ or ‘will be,’ we are mistaken, for these words are applicable only to becoming, and not to true being; and equally wrong are we in saying that what has become IS become and that what becomes IS becoming, and that the non-existent IS non-existent…These are the forms of time which imitate eternity and move in a circle measured by number.

    Thus was time made in the image of the eternal nature; and it was created together with the heavens, in order that if they were dissolved, it might perish with them. And God made the sun and moon and five other wanderers, as they are called, seven in all, and to each of them he gave a body moving in an orbit, being one of the seven orbits into which the circle of the other was divided. He put the moon in the orbit which was nearest to the earth, the sun in that next, the morning star and Mercury in the orbits which move opposite to the sun but with equal swiftness—this being the reason why they overtake and are overtaken by one another. All these bodies became living creatures, and learnt their appointed tasks, and began to move, the nearer more swiftly, the remoter more slowly, according to the diagonal movement of the other. And since this was controlled by the movement of the same, the seven planets in their courses appeared to describe spirals; and that appeared fastest which was slowest, and that which overtook others appeared to be overtaken by them. And God lighted a fire in the second orbit from the earth which is called the sun, to give light over the whole heaven, and to teach intelligent beings that knowledge of number which is derived from the revolution of the same. Thus arose day and night, which are the periods of the most intelligent nature; a month is created by the revolution of the moon, a year by that of the sun. Other periods of wonderful length and complexity are not observed by men in general; there is moreover a cycle or perfect year at the completion of which they all meet and coincide…To this end the stars came into being, that the created heaven might imitate the eternal nature.

    Thus far the universal animal was made in the divine image, but the other animals were not as yet included in him. And God created them according to the patterns or species of them which existed in the divine original. There are four of them: one of gods, another of birds, a third of fishes, and a fourth of animals. The gods were made in the form of a circle, which is the most perfect figure and the figure of the universe. They were created chiefly of fire, that they might be bright, and were made to know and follow the best, and to be scattered over the heavens, of which they were to be the glory. Two kinds of motion were assigned to them—first, the revolution in the same and around the same, in peaceful unchanging thought of the same; and to this was added a forward motion which was under the control of the same. Thus then the fixed stars were created, being divine and eternal animals, revolving on the same spot, and the wandering stars, in their courses, were created in the manner already described. The earth, which is our nurse, clinging around the pole extended through the universe, he made to be the guardian and artificer of night and day, first and eldest of gods that are in the interior of heaven. Vain would be the labour of telling all the figures of them, moving as in dance, and their juxta-positions and approximations, and when and where and behind what other stars they appear to disappear—to tell of all this without looking at a plan of them would be labour in vain.

    The knowledge of the other gods is beyond us, and we can only accept the traditions of the ancients, who were the children of the gods, as they said; for surely they must have known their own ancestors. Although they give no proof, we must believe them as is customary. They tell us that Oceanus and Tethys were the children of Earth and Heaven; that Phoreys, Cronos, and Rhea came in the next generation, and were followed by Zeus and Here, whose brothers and children are known to everybody.

    When all of them, both those who show themselves in the sky, and those who retire from view, had come into being, the Creator addressed them thus:—‘Gods, sons of gods, my works, if I will, are indissoluble. That which is bound may be dissolved, but only an evil being would dissolve that which is harmonious and happy. And although you are not immortal you shall not die, for I will hold you together. Hear me, then:—Three tribes of mortal beings have still to be created, but if created by me they would be like gods. Do ye therefore make them; I will implant in them the seed of immortality, and you shall weave together the mortal and immortal, and provide food for them, and receive them again in death.’ Thus he spake, and poured the remains of the elements into the cup in which he had mingled the soul of the universe. They were no longer pure as before, but diluted; and the mixture he distributed into souls equal in number to the stars, and assigned each to a star—then having mounted them, as in a chariot, he showed them the nature of the universe, and told them of their future birth and human lot. They were to be sown in the planets, and out of them was to come forth the most religious of animals, which would hereafter be called man. The souls were to be implanted in bodies, which were in a perpetual flux, whence, he said, would arise, first, sensation; secondly, love, which is a mixture of pleasure and pain; thirdly, fear and anger, and the opposite affections: and if they conquered these, they would live righteously, but if they were conquered by them, unrighteously. He who lived well would return to his native star, and would there have a blessed existence; but, if he lived ill, he would pass into the nature of a woman, and if he did not then alter his evil ways, into the likeness of some animal, until the reason which was in him reasserted her sway over the elements of fire, air, earth, water, which had engrossed her, and he regained his first and better nature. Having given this law to his creatures, that he might be guiltless of their future evil, he sowed them, some in the earth, some in the moon, and some in the other planets; and he ordered the younger gods to frame human bodies for them and to make the necessary additions to them, and to avert from them all but self-inflicted evil.

    Having given these commands, the Creator remained in his own nature. And his children, receiving from him the immortal principle, borrowed from the world portions of earth, air, fire, water, hereafter to be returned, which they fastened together, not with the adamantine bonds which bound themselves, but by little invisible pegs, making each separate body out of all the elements, subject to influx and efflux, and containing the courses of the soul. These swelling and surging as in a river moved irregularly and irrationally in all the six possible ways, forwards, backwards, right, left, up and down. But violent as were the internal and alimentary fluids, the tide became still more violent when the body came into contact with flaming fire, or the solid earth, or gliding waters, or the stormy wind; the motions produced by these impulses pass through the body to the soul and have the name of sensations. Uniting with the ever-flowing current, they shake the courses of the soul, stopping the revolution of the same and twisting in all sorts of ways the nature of the other, and the harmonical ratios of twos and threes and the mean terms which connect them, until the circles are bent and disordered and their motion becomes irregular. You may imagine a position of the body in which the head is resting upon the ground, and the legs are in the air, and the top is bottom and the left right. And something similar happens when the disordered motions of the soul come into contact with any external thing; they say the same or the other in a manner which is the very opposite of the truth, and they are false and foolish, and have no guiding principle in them. And when external impressions enter in, they are really conquered, though they seem to conquer.

    By reason of these affections the soul is at first without intelligence, but as time goes on the stream of nutriment abates, and the courses of the soul regain their proper motion, and apprehend the same and the other rightly, and become rational. The soul of him who has education is whole and perfect and escapes the worst disease, but, if a man’s education be neglected, he walks lamely through life and returns good for nothing to the world below. This, however, is an after-stage—at present, we are only concerned with the creation of the body and soul.

    The two divine courses were encased by the gods in a sphere which is called the head, and is the god and lord of us. And to this they gave the body to be a vehicle, and the members to be instruments, having the power of flexion and extension. Such was the origin of legs and arms. In the next place, the gods gave a forward motion to the human body, because the front part of man was the more honourable and had authority. And they put in a face in which they inserted organs to minister in all things to the providence of the soul. They first contrived the eyes, into which they conveyed a light akin to the light of day, making it flow through the pupils. When the light of the eye is surrounded by the light of day, then like falls upon like, and they unite and form one body which conveys to the soul the motions of visible objects. But when the visual ray goes forth into the darkness, then unlike falls upon unlike—the eye no longer sees, and we go to sleep. The fire or light, when kept in by the eyelids, equalizes the inward motions, and there is rest accompanied by few dreams; only when the greater motions remain they engender in us corresponding visions of the night. And now we shall be able to understand the nature of reflections in mirrors. The fires from within and from without meet about the smooth and bright surface of the mirror; and because they meet in a manner contrary to the usual mode, the right and left sides of the object are transposed. In a concave mirror the top and bottom are inverted, but this is no transposition.

    These are the second causes which God used as his ministers in fashioning the world. They are thought by many to be the prime causes, but they are not so; for they are destitute of mind and reason, and the lover of mind will not allow that there are any prime causes other than the rational and invisible ones—these he investigates first, and afterwards the causes of things which are moved by others, and which work by chance and without order. Of the second or concurrent causes of sight I have already spoken, and I will now speak of the higher purpose of God in giving us eyes. Sight is the source of the greatest benefits to us; for if our eyes had never seen the sun, stars, and heavens, the words which we have spoken would not have been uttered. The sight of them and their revolutions has given us the knowledge of number and time, the power of enquiry, and philosophy, which is the great blessing of human life; not to speak of the lesser benefits which even the vulgar can appreciate. God gave us the faculty of sight that we might behold the order of the heavens and create a corresponding order in our own erring minds. To the like end the gifts of speech and hearing were bestowed upon us; not for the sake of irrational pleasure, but in order that we might harmonize the courses of the soul by sympathy with the harmony of sound, and cure ourselves of our irregular and graceless ways.

    Thus far we have spoken of the works of mind; and there are other works done from necessity, which we must now place beside them; for the creation is made up of both, mind persuading necessity as far as possible to work out good. Before the heavens there existed fire, air, water, earth, which we suppose men to know, though no one has explained their nature, and we erroneously maintain them to be the letters or elements of the whole, although they cannot reasonably be compared even to syllables or first compounds. I am not now speaking of the first principles of things, because I cannot discover them by our present mode of enquiry. But as I observed the rule of probability at first, I will begin anew, seeking by the grace of God to observe it still.

    In our former discussion I distinguished two kinds of being—the unchanging or invisible, and the visible or changing. But now a third kind is required, which I shall call the receptacle or nurse of generation. There is a difficulty in arriving at an exact notion of this third kind, because the four elements themselves are of inexact natures and easily pass into one another, and are too transient to be detained by any one name; wherefore we are compelled to speak of water or fire, not as substances, but as qualities. They may be compared to images made of gold, which are continually assuming new forms. Somebody asks what they are; if you do not know, the safest answer is to reply that they are gold. In like manner there is a universal nature out of which all things are made, and which is like none of them; but they enter into and pass out of her, and are made after patterns of the true in a wonderful and inexplicable manner. The containing principle may be likened to a mother, the source or spring to a father, the intermediate nature to a child; and we may also remark that the matter which receives every variety of form must be formless, like the inodorous liquids which are prepared to receive scents, or the smooth and soft materials on which figures are impressed. In the same way space or matter is neither earth nor fire nor air nor water, but an invisible and formless being which receives all things, and in an incomprehensible manner partakes of the intelligible. But we may say, speaking generally, that fire is that part of this nature which is inflamed, water that which is moistened, and the like.

    Let me ask a question in which a great principle is involved: Is there an essence of fire and the other elements, or are there only fires visible to sense? I answer in a word: If mind is one thing and true opinion another, then there are self-existent essences; but if mind is the same with opinion, then the visible and corporeal is most real. But they are not the same, and they have a different origin and nature. The one comes to us by instruction, the other by persuasion, the one is rational, the other is irrational; the one is movable by persuasion, the other immovable; the one is possessed by every man, the other by the gods and by very few men. And we must acknowledge that as there are two kinds of knowledge, so there are two kinds of being corresponding to them; the one uncreated, indestructible, immovable, which is seen by intelligence only; the other created, which is always becoming in place and vanishing out of place, and is apprehended by opinion and sense. There is also a third nature—that of space, which is indestructible, and is perceived by a kind of spurious reason without the help of sense. This is presented to us in a dreamy manner, and yet is said to be necessary, for we say that all things must be somewhere in space. For they are the images of other things and must therefore have a separate existence and exist in something (i.e. in space). But true reason assures us that while two things (i.e. the idea and the image) are different they cannot inhere in one another, so as to be one and two at the same time.

    To sum up: Being and generation and space, these three, existed before the heavens, and the nurse or vessel of generation, moistened by water and inflamed by fire, and taking the forms of air and earth, assumed various shapes. By the motion of the vessel, the elements were divided, and like grain winnowed by fans, the close and heavy particles settled in one place, the light and airy ones in another. At first they were without reason and measure, and had only certain faint traces of themselves, until God fashioned them by figure and number. In this, as in every other part of creation, I suppose God to have made things, as far as was possible, fair and good, out of things not fair and good.

    And now I will explain to you the generation of the world by a method with which your scientific training will have made you familiar. Fire, air, earth, and water are bodies and therefore solids, and solids are contained in planes, and plane rectilinear figures are made up of triangles. Of triangles there are two kinds; one having the opposite sides equal (isosceles), the other with unequal sides (scalene). These we may fairly assume to be the original elements of fire and the other bodies; what principles are prior to these God only knows, and he of men whom God loves. Next, we must determine what are the four most beautiful figures which are unlike one another and yet sometimes capable of resolution into one another…Of the two kinds of triangles the equal-sided has but one form, the unequal-sided has an infinite variety of forms; and there is none more beautiful than that which forms the half of an equilateral triangle. Let us then choose two triangles; one, the isosceles, the other, that form of scalene which has the square of the longer side three times as great as the square of the lesser side; and affirm that, out of these, fire and the other elements have been constructed.

    I was wrong in imagining that all the four elements could be generated into and out of one another. For as they are formed, three of them from the triangle which has the sides unequal, the fourth from the triangle which has equal sides, three can be resolved into one another, but the fourth cannot be resolved into them nor they into it. So much for their passage into one another: I must now speak of their construction. From the triangle of which the hypotenuse is twice the lesser side the three first regular solids are formed—first, the equilateral pyramid or tetrahedron; secondly, the octahedron; thirdly, the icosahedron; and from the isosceles triangle is formed the cube. And there is a fifth figure (which is made out of twelve pentagons), the dodecahedron—this God used as a model for the twelvefold division of the Zodiac.

    Let us now assign the geometrical forms to their respective elements. The cube is the most stable of them because resting on a quadrangular plane surface, and composed of isosceles triangles. To the earth then, which is the most stable of bodies and the most easily modelled of them, may be assigned the form of a cube; and the remaining forms to the other elements,—to fire the pyramid, to air the octahedron, and to water the icosahedron,—according to their degrees of lightness or heaviness or power, or want of power, of penetration. The single particles of any of the elements are not seen by reason of their smallness; they only become visible when collected. The ratios of their motions, numbers, and other properties, are ordered by the God, who harmonized them as far as necessity permitted.

    The probable conclusion is as follows:—Earth, when dissolved by the more penetrating element of fire, whether acting immediately or through the medium of air or water, is decomposed but not transformed. Water, when divided by fire or air, becomes one part fire, and two parts air. A volume of air divided becomes two of fire. On the other hand, when condensed, two volumes of fire make a volume of air; and two and a half parts of air condense into one of water. Any element which is fastened upon by fire is cut by the sharpness of the triangles, until at length, coalescing with the fire, it is at rest; for similars are not affected by similars. When two kinds of bodies quarrel with one another, then the tendency to decomposition continues until the smaller either escapes to its kindred element or becomes one with its conqueror. And this tendency in bodies to condense or escape is a source of motion…Where there is motion there must be a mover, and where there is a mover there must be something to move. These cannot exist in what is uniform, and therefore motion is due to want of uniformity. But then why, when things are divided after their kinds, do they not cease from motion? The answer is, that the circular motion of all things compresses them, and as ‘nature abhors a vacuum,’ the finer and more subtle particles of the lighter elements, such as fire and air, are thrust into the interstices of the larger, each of them penetrating according to their rarity, and thus all the elements are on their way up and down everywhere and always into their own places. Hence there is a principle of inequality, and therefore of motion, in all time.

    In the next place, we may observe that there are different kinds of fire—(1) flame, (2) light that burns not, (3) the red heat of the embers of fire. And there are varieties of air, as for example, the pure aether, the opaque mist, and other nameless forms. Water, again, is of two kinds, liquid and fusile. The liquid is composed of small and unequal particles, the fusile of large and uniform particles and is more solid, but nevertheless melts at the approach of fire, and then spreads upon the earth. When the substance cools, the fire passes into the air, which is displaced, and forces together and condenses the liquid mass. This process is called cooling and congealment. Of the fusile kinds the fairest and heaviest is gold; this is hardened by filtration through rock, and is of a bright yellow colour. A shoot of gold which is darker and denser than the rest is called adamant. Another kind is called copper, which is harder and yet lighter because the interstices are larger than in gold. There is mingled with it a fine and small portion of earth which comes out in the form of rust. These are a few of the conjectures which philosophy forms, when, leaving the eternal nature, she turns for innocent recreation to consider the truths of generation.

    Water which is mingled with fire is called liquid because it rolls upon the earth, and soft because its bases give way. This becomes more equable when separated from fire and air, and then congeals into hail or ice, or the looser forms of hoar frost or snow. There are other waters which are called juices and are distilled through plants. Of these we may mention, first, wine, which warms the soul as well as the body; secondly, oily substances, as for example, oil or pitch; thirdly, honey, which relaxes the contracted parts of the mouth and so produces sweetness; fourthly, vegetable acid, which is frothy and has a burning quality and dissolves the flesh. Of the kinds of earth, that which is filtered through water passes into stone; the water is broken up by the earth and escapes in the form of air—this in turn presses upon the mass of earth, and the earth, compressed into an indissoluble union with the remaining water, becomes rock. Rock, when it is made up of equal particles, is fair and transparent, but the reverse when of unequal. Earth is converted into pottery when the watery part is suddenly drawn away; or if moisture remains, the earth, when fused by fire, becomes, on cooling, a stone of a black colour. When the earth is finer and of a briny nature then two half-solid bodies are formed by separating the water,—soda and salt. The strong compounds of earth and water are not soluble by water, but only by fire. Earth itself, when not consolidated, is dissolved by water; when consolidated, by fire only. The cohesion of water, when strong, is dissolved by fire only; when weak, either by air or fire, the former entering the interstices, the latter penetrating even the triangles. Air when strongly condensed is indissoluble by any power which does not reach the triangles, and even when not strongly condensed is only resolved by fire. Compounds of earth and water are unaffected by water while the water occupies the interstices in them, but begin to liquefy when fire enters into the interstices of the water. They are of two kinds, some of them, like glass, having more earth, others, like wax, having more water in them.

    Having considered objects of sense, we now pass on to sensation. But we cannot explain sensation without explaining the nature of flesh and of the mortal soul; and as we cannot treat of both together, in order that we may proceed at once to the sensations we must assume the existence of body and soul.

    What makes fire burn? The fineness of the sides, the sharpness of the angles, the smallness of the particles, the quickness of the motion. Moreover, the pyramid, which is the figure of fire, is more cutting than any other. The feeling of cold is produced by the larger particles of moisture outside the body trying to eject the smaller ones in the body which they compress. The struggle which arises between elements thus unnaturally brought together causes shivering. That is hard to which the flesh yields, and soft which yields to the flesh, and these two terms are also relative to one another. The yielding matter is that which has the slenderest base, whereas that which has a rectangular base is compact and repellent. Light and heavy are wrongly explained with reference to a lower and higher in place. For in the universe, which is a sphere, there is no opposition of above or below, and that which is to us above would be below to a man standing at the antipodes. The greater or less difficulty in detaching any element from its like is the real cause of heaviness or of lightness. If you draw the earth into the dissimilar air, the particles of earth cling to their native element, and you more easily detach a small portion than a large. There would be the same difficulty in moving any of the upper elements towards the lower. The smooth and the rough are severally produced by the union of evenness with compactness, and of hardness with inequality.

    Pleasure and pain are the most important of the affections common to the whole body. According to our general doctrine of sensation, parts of the body which are easily moved readily transmit the motion to the mind; but parts which are not easily moved have no effect upon the patient. The bones and hair are of the latter kind, sight and hearing of the former. Ordinary affections are neither pleasant nor painful. The impressions of sight afford an example of these, and are neither violent nor sudden. But sudden replenishments of the body cause pleasure, and sudden disturbances, as for example cuttings and burnings, have the opposite effect.

    From sensations common to the whole body, we proceed to those of particular parts. The affections of the tongue appear to be caused by contraction and dilation, but they have more of roughness or smoothness than is found in other affections. Earthy particles, entering into the small veins of the tongue which reach to the heart, when they melt into and dry up the little veins are astringent if they are rough; or if not so rough, they are only harsh, and if excessively abstergent, like potash and soda, bitter. Purgatives of a weaker sort are called salt and, having no bitterness, are rather agreeable. Inflammatory bodies, which by their lightness are carried up into the head, cutting all that comes in their way, are termed pungent. But when these are refined by putrefaction, and enter the narrow veins of the tongue, and meet there particles of earth and air, two kinds of globules are formed—one of earthy and impure liquid, which boils and ferments, the other of pure and transparent water, which are called bubbles; of all these affections the cause is termed acid. When, on the other hand, the composition of the deliquescent particles is congenial to the tongue, and disposes the parts according to their nature, this remedial power in them is called sweet.

    Smells are not divided into kinds; all of them are transitional, and arise out of the decomposition of one element into another, for the simple air or water is without smell. They are vapours or mists, thinner than water and thicker than air: and hence in drawing in the breath, when there is an obstruction, the air passes, but there is no smell. They have no names, but are distinguished as pleasant and unpleasant, and their influence extends over the whole region from the head to the navel.

    Hearing is the effect of a stroke which is transmitted through the ears by means of the air, brain, and blood to the soul, beginning at the head and extending to the liver. The sound which moves swiftly is acute; that which moves slowly is grave; that which is uniform is smooth, and the opposite is harsh. Loudness depends on the quantity of the sound. Of the harmony of sounds I will hereafter speak.

    Colours are flames which emanate from all bodies, having particles corresponding to the sense of sight. Some of the particles are less and some larger, and some are equal to the parts of the sight. The equal particles appear transparent; the larger contract, and the lesser dilate the sight. White is produced by the dilation, black by the contraction, of the particles of sight. There is also a swifter motion of another sort of fire which forces a way through the passages of the eyes, and elicits from them a union of fire and water which we call tears. The inner fire flashes forth, and the outer finds a way in and is extinguished in the moisture, and all sorts of colours are generated by the mixture. This affection is termed by us dazzling, and the object which produces it is called bright. There is yet another sort of fire which mingles with the moisture of the eye without flashing, and produces a colour like blood—to this we give the name of red. A bright element mingling with red and white produces a colour which we call auburn. The law of proportion, however, according to which compound colours are formed, cannot be determined scientifically or even probably. Red, when mingled with black and white, gives a purple hue, which becomes umber when the colours are burnt and there is a larger admixture of black. Flame-colour is a mixture of auburn and dun; dun of white and black; yellow of white and auburn. White and bright meeting, and falling upon a full black, become dark blue; dark blue mingling with white becomes a light blue; the union of flame-colour and black makes leek-green. There is no difficulty in seeing how other colours are probably composed. But he who should attempt to test the truth of this by experiment, would forget the difference of the human and divine nature. God only is able to compound and resolve substances; such experiments are impossible to man.

    These are the elements of necessity which the Creator received in the world of generation when he made the all-sufficient and perfect creature, using the secondary causes as his ministers, but himself fashioning the good in all things. For there are two sorts of causes, the one divine, the other necessary; and we should seek to discover the divine above all, and, for their sake, the necessary, because without them the higher cannot be attained by us.

    Having now before us the causes out of which the rest of our discourse is to be framed, let us go back to the point at which we began, and add a fair ending to our tale. As I said at first, all things were originally a chaos in which there was no order or proportion. The elements of this chaos were arranged by the Creator, and out of them he made the world. Of the divine he himself was the author, but he committed to his offspring the creation of the mortal. From him they received the immortal soul, but themselves made the body to be its vehicle, and constructed within another soul which was mortal, and subject to terrible affections—pleasure, the inciter of evil; pain, which deters from good; rashness and fear, foolish counsellors; anger hard to be appeased; hope easily led astray. These they mingled with irrational sense and all-daring love according to necessary laws and so framed man. And, fearing to pollute the divine element, they gave the mortal soul a separate habitation in the breast, parted off from the head by a narrow isthmus. And as in a house the women’s apartments are divided from the men’s, the cavity of the thorax was divided into two parts, a higher and a lower. The higher of the two, which is the seat of courage and anger, lies nearer to the head, between the midriff and the neck, and assists reason in restraining the desires. The heart is the house of guard in which all the veins meet, and through them reason sends her commands to the extremity of her kingdom. When the passions are in revolt, or danger approaches from without, then the heart beats and swells; and the creating powers, knowing this, implanted in the body the soft and bloodless substance of the lung, having a porous and springy nature like a sponge, and being kept cool by drink and air which enters through the trachea.

    The part of the soul which desires meat and drink was placed between the midriff and navel, where they made a sort of manger; and here they bound it down, like a wild animal, away from the council-chamber, and leaving the better principle undisturbed to advise quietly for the good of the whole. For the Creator knew that the belly would not listen to reason, and was under the power of idols and fancies. Wherefore he framed the liver to connect with the lower nature, contriving that it should be compact, and bright, and sweet, and also bitter and smooth, in order that the power of thought which originates in the mind might there be reflected, terrifying the belly with the elements of bitterness and gall, and a suffusion of bilious colours when the liver is contracted, and causing pain and misery by twisting out of its place the lobe and closing up the vessels and gates. And the converse happens when some gentle inspiration coming from intelligence mirrors the opposite fancies, giving rest and sweetness and freedom, and at night, moderation and peace accompanied with prophetic insight, when reason and sense are asleep. For the authors of our being, in obedience to their Father’s will and in order to make men as good as they could, gave to the liver the power of divination, which is never active when men are awake or in health; but when they are under the influence of some disorder or enthusiasm then they receive intimations, which have to be interpreted by others who are called prophets, but should rather be called interpreters of prophecy; after death these intimations become unintelligible. The spleen which is situated in the neighbourhood, on the left side, keeps the liver bright and clean, as a napkin does a mirror, and the evacuations of the liver are received into it; and being a hollow tissue it is for a time swollen with these impurities, but when the body is purged it returns to its natural size.

    The truth concerning the soul can only be established by the word of God. Still, we may venture to assert what is probable both concerning soul and body.

    The creative powers were aware of our tendency to excess. And so when they made the belly to be a receptacle for food, in order that men might not perish by insatiable gluttony, they formed the convolutions of the intestines, in this way retarding the passage of food through the body, lest mankind should be absorbed in eating and drinking, and the whole race become impervious to divine philosophy.

    The creation of bones and flesh was on this wise. The foundation of these is the marrow which binds together body and soul, and the marrow is made out of such of the primary triangles as are adapted by their perfection to produce all the four elements. These God took and mingled them in due proportion, making as many kinds of marrow as there were hereafter to be kinds of souls. The receptacle of the divine soul he made round, and called that portion of the marrow brain, intending that the vessel containing this substance should be the head. The remaining part he divided into long and round figures, and to these as to anchors, fastening the mortal soul, he proceeded to make the rest of the body, first forming for both parts a covering of bone. The bone was formed by sifting pure smooth earth and wetting it with marrow. It was then thrust alternately into fire and water, and thus rendered insoluble by either. Of bone he made a globe which he placed around the brain, leaving a narrow opening, and around the marrow of the neck and spine he formed the vertebrae, like hinges, which extended from the head through the whole of the trunk. And as the bone was brittle and liable to mortify and destroy the marrow by too great rigidity and susceptibility to heat and cold, he contrived sinews and flesh—the first to give flexibility, the second to guard against heat and cold, and to be a protection against falls, containing a warm moisture, which in summer exudes and cools the body, and in winter is a defence against cold. Having this in view, the Creator mingled earth with fire and water and mixed with them a ferment of acid and salt, so as to form pulpy flesh. But the sinews he made of a mixture of bone and unfermented flesh, giving them a mean nature between the two, and a yellow colour. Hence they were more glutinous than flesh, but softer than bone. The bones which have most of the living soul within them he covered with the thinnest film of flesh, those which have least of it, he lodged deeper. At the joints he diminished the flesh in order not to impede the flexure of the limbs, and also to avoid clogging the perceptions of the mind. About the thighs and arms, which have no sense because there is little soul in the marrow, and about the inner bones, he laid the flesh thicker. For where the flesh is thicker there is less feeling, except in certain parts which the Creator has made solely of flesh, as for example, the tongue. Had the combination of solid bone and thick flesh been consistent with acute perceptions, the Creator would have given man a sinewy and fleshy head, and then he would have lived twice as long. But our creators were of opinion that a shorter life which was better was preferable to a longer which was worse, and therefore they covered the head with thin bone, and placed the sinews at the extremity of the head round the neck, and fastened the jawbones to them below the face. And they framed the mouth, having teeth and tongue and lips, with a view to the necessary and the good; for food is a necessity, and the river of speech is the best of rivers. Still, the head could not be left a bare globe of bone on account of the extremes of heat and cold, nor be allowed to become dull and senseless by an overgrowth of flesh. Wherefore it was covered by a peel or skin which met and grew by the help of the cerebral humour. The diversity of the sutures was caused by the struggle of the food against the courses of the soul. The skin of the head was pierced by fire, and out of the punctures came forth a moisture, part liquid, and part of a skinny nature, which was hardened by the pressure of the external cold and became hair. And God gave hair to the head of man to be a light covering, so that it might not interfere with his perceptions. Nails were formed by combining sinew, skin, and bone, and were made by the creators with a view to the future when, as they knew, women and other animals who would require them would be framed out of man.

    The gods also mingled natures akin to that of man with other forms and perceptions. Thus trees and plants were created, which were originally wild and have been adapted by cultivation to our use. They partake of that third kind of life which is seated between the midriff and the navel, and is altogether passive and incapable of reflection.

    When the creators had furnished all these natures for our sustenance, they cut channels through our bodies as in a garden, watering them with a perennial stream. Two were cut down the back, along the back bone, where the skin and flesh meet, one on the right and the other on the left, having the marrow of generation between them. In the next place, they divided the veins about the head and interlaced them with each other in order that they might form an additional link between the head and the body, and that the sensations from both sides might be diffused throughout the body. In the third place, they contrived the passage of liquids, which may be explained in this way:—Finer bodies retain coarser, but not the coarser the finer, and the belly is capable of retaining food, but not fire and air. God therefore formed a network of fire and air to irrigate the veins, having within it two lesser nets, and stretched cords reaching from both the lesser nets to the extremity of the outer net. The inner parts of the net were made by him of fire, the lesser nets and their cavities of air. The two latter he made to pass into the mouth; the one ascending by the air-pipes from the lungs, the other by the side of the air-pipes from the belly. The entrance to the first he divided into two parts, both of which he made to meet at the channels of the nose, that when the mouth was closed the passage connected with it might still be fed with air. The cavity of the network he spread around the hollows of the body, making the entire receptacle to flow into and out of the lesser nets and the lesser nets into and out of it, while the outer net found a way into and out of the pores of the body, and the internal heat followed the air to and fro. These, as we affirm, are the phenomena of respiration. And all this process takes place in order that the body may be watered and cooled and nourished, and the meat and drink digested and liquefied and carried into the veins.

    The causes of respiration have now to be considered. The exhalation of the breath through the mouth and nostrils displaces the external air, and at the same time leaves a vacuum into which through the pores the air which is displaced enters. Also the vacuum which is made when the air is exhaled through the pores is filled up by the inhalation of breath through the mouth and nostrils. The explanation of this double phenomenon is as follows:—Elements move towards their natural places. Now as every animal has within him a fountain of fire, the air which is inhaled through the mouth and nostrils, on coming into contact with this, is heated; and when heated, in accordance with the law of attraction, it escapes by the way it entered toward the place of fire. On leaving the body it is cooled and drives round the air which it displaces through the pores into the empty lungs. This again is in turn heated by the internal fire and escapes, as it entered, through the pores.

    The phenomena of medical cupping-glasses, of swallowing, and of the hurling of bodies, are to be explained on a similar principle; as also sounds, which are sometimes discordant on account of the inequality of them, and again harmonious by reason of equality. The slower sounds reaching the swifter, when they begin to pause, by degrees assimilate with them: whence arises a pleasure which even the unwise feel, and which to the wise becomes a higher sense of delight, being an imitation of divine harmony in mortal motions. Streams flow, lightnings play, amber and the magnet attract, not by reason of attraction, but because ‘nature abhors a vacuum,’ and because things, when compounded or dissolved, move different ways, each to its own place.

    I will now return to the phenomena of respiration. The fire, entering the belly, minces the food, and as it escapes, fills the veins by drawing after it the divided portions, and thus the streams of nutriment are diffused through the body. The fruits or herbs which are our daily sustenance take all sorts of colours when intermixed, but the colour of red or fire predominates, and hence the liquid which we call blood is red, being the nurturing principle of the body, whence all parts are watered and empty places filled.

    The process of repletion and depletion is produced by the attraction of like to like, after the manner of the universal motion. The external elements by their attraction are always diminishing the substance of the body: the particles of blood, too, formed out of the newly digested food, are attracted towards kindred elements within the body and so fill up the void. When more is taken away than flows in, then we decay; and when less, we grow and increase.

    The young of every animal has the triangles new and closely locked together, and yet the entire frame is soft and delicate, being newly made of marrow and nurtured on milk. These triangles are sharper than those which enter the body from without in the shape of food, and therefore they cut them up. But as life advances, the triangles wear out and are no longer able to assimilate food; and at length, when the bonds which unite the triangles of the marrow become undone, they in turn unloose the bonds of the soul; and if the release be according to nature, she then flies away with joy. For the death which is natural is pleasant, but that which is caused by violence is painful.

    Every one may understand the origin of diseases. They may be occasioned by the disarrangement or disproportion of the elements out of which the body is framed. This is the origin of many of them, but the worst of all owe their severity to the following causes: There is a natural order in the human frame according to which the flesh and sinews are made of blood, the sinews out of the fibres, and the flesh out of the congealed substance which is formed by separation from the fibres. The glutinous matter which comes away from the sinews and the flesh, not only binds the flesh to the bones, but nourishes the bones and waters the marrow. When these processes take place in regular order the body is in health.

    But when the flesh wastes and returns into the veins there is discoloured blood as well as air in the veins, having acid and salt qualities, from which is generated every sort of phlegm and bile. All things go the wrong way and cease to give nourishment to the body, no longer preserving their natural courses, but at war with themselves and destructive to the constitution of the body. The oldest part of the flesh which is hard to decompose blackens from long burning, and from being corroded grows bitter, and as the bitter element refines away, becomes acid. When tinged with blood the bitter substance has a red colour, and this when mixed with black takes the hue of grass; or again, the bitter substance has an auburn colour, when new flesh is decomposed by the internal flame. To all which phenomena some physician or philosopher who was able to see the one in many has given the name of bile. The various kinds of bile have names answering to their colours. Lymph or serum is of two kinds: first, the whey of blood, which is gentle; secondly, the secretion of dark and bitter bile, which, when mingled under the influence of heat with salt, is malignant and is called acid phlegm. There is also white phlegm, formed by the decomposition of young and tender flesh, and covered with little bubbles, separately invisible, but becoming visible when collected. The water of tears and perspiration and similar substances is also the watery part of fresh phlegm. All these humours become sources of disease when the blood is replenished in irregular ways and not by food or drink. The danger, however, is not so great when the foundation remains, for then there is a possibility of recovery. But when the substance which unites the flesh and bones is diseased, and is no longer renewed from the muscles and sinews, and instead of being oily and smooth and glutinous becomes rough and salt and dry, then the fleshy parts fall away and leave the sinews bare and full of brine, and the flesh gets back again into the circulation of the blood, and makes the previously mentioned disorders still greater. There are other and worse diseases which are prior to these; as when the bone through the density of the flesh does not receive sufficient air, and becomes stagnant and gangrened, and crumbling away passes into the food, and the food into the flesh, and the flesh returns again into the blood. Worst of all and most fatal is the disease of the marrow, by which the whole course of the body is reversed. There is a third class of diseases which are produced, some by wind and some by phlegm and some by bile. When the lung, which is the steward of the air, is obstructed, by rheums, and in one part no air, and in another too much, enters in, then the parts which are unrefreshed by air corrode, and other parts are distorted by the excess of air; and in this manner painful diseases are produced. The most painful are caused by wind generated within the body, which gets about the great sinews of the shoulders—these are termed tetanus. The cure of them is difficult, and in most cases they are relieved only by fever. White phlegm, which is dangerous if kept in, by reason of the air bubbles, is not equally dangerous if able to escape through the pores, although it variegates the body, generating diverse kinds of leprosies. If, when mingled with black bile, it disturbs the courses of the head in sleep, there is not so much danger; but if it assails those who are awake, then the attack is far more dangerous, and is called epilepsy or the sacred disease. Acid and salt phlegm is the source of catarrh.

    Inflammations originate in bile, which is sometimes relieved by boils and swellings, but when detained, and above all when mingled with pure blood, generates many inflammatory disorders, disturbing the position of the fibres which are scattered about in the blood in order to maintain the balance of rare and dense which is necessary to its regular circulation. If the bile, which is only stale blood, or liquefied flesh, comes in little by little, it is congealed by the fibres and produces internal cold and shuddering. But when it enters with more of a flood it overcomes the fibres by its heat and reaches the spinal marrow, and burning up the cables of the soul sets her free from the body. When on the other hand the body, though wasted, still holds out, then the bile is expelled, like an exile from a factious state, causing associating diarrhoeas and dysenteries and similar disorders. The body which is diseased from the effects of fire is in a continual fever; when air is the agent, the fever is quotidian; when water, the fever intermits a day; when earth, which is the most sluggish element, the fever intermits three days and is with difficulty shaken off.

    Of mental disorders there are two sorts, one madness, the other ignorance, and they may be justly attributed to disease. Excessive pleasures or pains are among the greatest diseases, and deprive men of their senses. When the seed about the spinal marrow is too abundant, the body has too great pleasures and pains; and during a great part of his life he who is the subject of them is more or less mad. He is often thought bad, but this is a mistake; for the truth is that the intemperance of lust is due to the fluidity of the marrow produced by the loose consistency of the bones. And this is true of vice in general, which is commonly regarded as disgraceful, whereas it is really involuntary and arises from a bad habit of the body and evil education. In like manner the soul is often made vicious by the influence of bodily pain; the briny phlegm and other bitter and bilious humours wander over the body and find no exit, but are compressed within, and mingle their own vapours with the motions of the soul, and are carried to the three places of the soul, creating infinite varieties of trouble and melancholy, of rashness and cowardice, of forgetfulness and stupidity. When men are in this evil plight of body, and evil forms of government and evil discourses are superadded, and there is no education to save them, they are corrupted through two causes; but of neither of them are they really the authors. For the planters are to blame rather than the plants, the educators and not the educated. Still, we should endeavour to attain virtue and avoid vice; but this is part of another subject.

    Enough of disease—I have now to speak of the means by which the mind and body are to be preserved, a higher theme than the other. The good is the beautiful, and the beautiful is the symmetrical, and there is no greater or fairer symmetry than that of body and soul, as the contrary is the greatest of deformities. A leg or an arm too long or too short is at once ugly and unserviceable, and the same is true if body and soul are disproportionate. For a strong and impassioned soul may ‘fret the pigmy body to decay,’ and so produce convulsions and other evils. The violence of controversy, or the earnestness of enquiry, will often generate inflammations and rheums which are not understood, or assigned to their true cause by the professors of medicine. And in like manner the body may be too much for the soul, darkening the reason, and quickening the animal desires. The only security is to preserve the balance of the two, and to this end the mathematician or philosopher must practise gymnastics, and the gymnast must cultivate music. The parts of the body too must be treated in the same way—they should receive their appropriate exercise. For the body is set in motion when it is heated and cooled by the elements which enter in, or is dried up and moistened by external things; and, if given up to these processes when at rest, it is liable to destruction. But the natural motion, as in the world, so also in the human frame, produces harmony and divides hostile powers. The best exercise is the spontaneous motion of the body, as in gymnastics, because most akin to the motion of mind; not so good is the motion of which the source is in another, as in sailing or riding; least good when the body is at rest and the motion is in parts only, which is a species of motion imparted by physic. This should only be resorted to by men of sense in extreme cases; lesser diseases are not to be irritated by medicine. For every disease is akin to the living being and has an appointed term, just as life has, which depends on the form of the triangles, and cannot be protracted when they are worn out. And he who, instead of accepting his destiny, endeavours to prolong his life by medicine, is likely to multiply and magnify his diseases. Regimen and not medicine is the true cure, when a man has time at his disposal.

    Enough of the nature of man and of the body, and of training and education. The subject is a great one and cannot be adequately treated as an appendage to another. To sum up all in a word: there are three kinds of soul located within us, and any one of them, if remaining inactive, becomes very weak; if exercised, very strong. Wherefore we should duly train and exercise all three kinds.

    The divine soul God lodged in the head, to raise us, like plants which are not of earthly origin, to our kindred; for the head is nearest to heaven. He who is intent upon the gratification of his desires and cherishes the mortal soul, has all his ideas mortal, and is himself mortal in the truest sense. But he who seeks after knowledge and exercises the divine part of himself in godly and immortal thoughts, attains to truth and immortality, as far as is possible to man, and also to happiness, while he is training up within him the divine principle and indwelling power of order. There is only one way in which one person can benefit another; and that is by assigning to him his proper nurture and motion. To the motions of the soul answer the motions of the universe, and by the study of these the individual is restored to his original nature.

    Thus we have finished the discussion of the universe, which, according to our original intention, has now been brought down to the creation of man. Completeness seems to require that something should be briefly said about other animals: first of women, who are probably degenerate and cowardly men. And when they degenerated, the gods implanted in men the desire of union with them, creating in man one animate substance and in woman another in the following manner:—The outlet for liquids they connected with the living principle of the spinal marrow, which the man has the desire to emit into the fruitful womb of the woman; this is like a fertile field in which the seed is quickened and matured, and at last brought to light. When this desire is unsatisfied the man is over-mastered by the power of the generative organs, and the woman is subjected to disorders from the obstruction of the passages of the breath, until the two meet and pluck the fruit of the tree.

    The race of birds was created out of innocent, light-minded men, who thought to pursue the study of the heavens by sight; these were transformed into birds, and grew feathers instead of hair. The race of wild animals were men who had no philosophy, and never looked up to heaven or used the courses of the head, but followed only the influences of passion. Naturally they turned to their kindred earth, and put their forelegs to the ground, and their heads were crushed into strange oblong forms. Some of them have four feet, and some of them more than four,—the latter, who are the more senseless, drawing closer to their native element; the most senseless of all have no limbs and trail their whole body on the ground. The fourth kind are the inhabitants of the waters; these are made out of the most senseless and ignorant and impure of men, whom God placed in the uttermost parts of the world in return for their utter ignorance, and caused them to respire water instead of the pure element of air. Such are the laws by which animals pass into one another.

    And so the world received animals, mortal and immortal, and was fulfilled with them, and became a visible God, comprehending the visible, made in the image of the Intellectual, being the one perfect only-begotten heaven.

Section 2

  Nature in the aspect which she presented to a Greek philosopher
  of the fourth century before Christ is not easily reproduced to
  modern eyes. The associations of mythology and poetry have to be
  added, and the unconscious influence of science has to be
  subtracted, before we can behold the heavens or the earth as they
  appeared to the Greek. The philosopher himself was a child and
  also a man—a child in the range of his attainments, but also a
  great intelligence having an insight into nature, and often
  anticipations of the truth. He was full of original thoughts, and
  yet liable to be imposed upon by the most obvious fallacies. He
  occasionally confused numbers with ideas, and atoms with numbers;
  his a priori notions were out of all proportion to his
  experience. He was ready to explain the phenomena of the heavens
  by the most trivial analogies of earth. The experiments which
  nature worked for him he sometimes accepted, but he never tried
  experiments for himself which would either prove or disprove his
  theories. His knowledge was unequal; while in some branches, such
  as medicine and astronomy, he had made considerable proficiency,
  there were others, such as chemistry, electricity, mechanics, of
  which the very names were unknown to him. He was the natural
  enemy of mythology, and yet mythological ideas still retained
  their hold over him. He was endeavouring to form a conception of
  principles, but these principles or ideas were regarded by him as
  real powers or entities, to which the world had been subjected.
  He was always tending to argue from what was near to what was
  remote, from what was known to what was unknown, from man to the
  universe, and back again from the universe to man. While he was
  arranging the world, he was arranging the forms of thought in his
  own mind; and the light from within and the light from without
  often crossed and helped to confuse one another. He might be
  compared to a builder engaged in some great design, who could
  only dig with his hands because he was unprovided with common
  tools; or to some poet or musician, like Tynnichus (Ion), obliged
  to accommodate his lyric raptures to the limits of the tetrachord
  or of the flute.

  The Hesiodic and Orphic cosmogonies were a phase of thought
  intermediate between mythology and philosophy and had a great
  influence on the beginnings of knowledge. There was nothing
  behind them; they were to physical science what the poems of
  Homer were to early Greek history. They made men think of the
  world as a whole; they carried the mind back into the infinity of
  past time; they suggested the first observation of the effects of
  fire and water on the earth’s surface. To the ancient physics
  they stood much in the same relation which geology does to modern
  science. But the Greek was not, like the enquirer of the last
  generation, confined to a period of six thousand years; he was
  able to speculate freely on the effects of infinite ages in the
  production of physical phenomena. He could imagine cities which
  had existed time out of mind (States.; Laws), laws or forms of
  art and music which had lasted, ‘not in word only, but in very
  truth, for ten thousand years’ (Laws); he was aware that natural
  phenomena like the Delta of the Nile might have slowly
  accumulated in long periods of time (Hdt.). But he seems to have
  supposed that the course of events was recurring rather than
  progressive. To this he was probably led by the fixedness of
  Egyptian customs and the general observation that there were
  other civilisations in the world more ancient than that of
  Hellas.

  The ancient philosophers found in mythology many ideas which, if
  not originally derived from nature, were easily transferred to
  her—such, for example, as love or hate, corresponding to
  attraction or repulsion; or the conception of necessity allied
  both to the regularity and irregularity of nature; or of chance,
  the nameless or unknown cause; or of justice, symbolizing the law
  of compensation; are of the Fates and Furies, typifying the fixed
  order or the extraordinary convulsions of nature. Their own
  interpretations of Homer and the poets were supposed by them to
  be the original meaning. Musing in themselves on the phenomena of
  nature, they were relieved at being able to utter the thoughts of
  their hearts in figures of speech which to them were not figures,
  and were already consecrated by tradition. Hesiod and the Orphic
  poets moved in a region of half-personification in which the
  meaning or principle appeared through the person. In their vaster
  conceptions of Chaos, Erebus, Aether, Night, and the like, the
  first rude attempts at generalization are dimly seen. The Gods
  themselves, especially the greater Gods, such as Zeus, Poseidon,
  Apollo, Athene, are universals as well as individuals. They were
  gradually becoming lost in a common conception of mind or God.
  They continued to exist for the purposes of ritual or of art; but
  from the sixth century onwards or even earlier there arose and
  gained strength in the minds of men the notion of ‘one God,
  greatest among Gods and men, who was all sight, all hearing, all
  knowing’ (Xenophanes).

  Under the influence of such ideas, perhaps also deriving from the
  traditions of their own or of other nations scraps of medicine
  and astronomy, men came to the observation of nature. The Greek
  philosopher looked at the blue circle of the heavens and it
  flashed upon him that all things were one; the tumult of sense
  abated, and the mind found repose in the thought which former
  generations had been striving to realize. The first expression of
  this was some element, rarefied by degrees into a pure
  abstraction, and purged from any tincture of sense. Soon an inner
  world of ideas began to be unfolded, more absorbing, more
  overpowering, more abiding than the brightest of visible objects,
  which to the eye of the philosopher looking inward, seemed to
  pale before them, retaining only a faint and precarious
  existence. At the same time, the minds of men parted into the two
  great divisions of those who saw only a principle of motion, and
  of those who saw only a principle of rest, in nature and in
  themselves; there were born Heracliteans or Eleatics, as there
  have been in later ages born Aristotelians or Platonists. Like
  some philosophers in modern times, who are accused of making a
  theory first and finding their facts afterwards, the advocates of
  either opinion never thought of applying either to themselves or
  to their adversaries the criterion of fact. They were mastered by
  their ideas and not masters of them. Like the Heraclitean
  fanatics whom Plato has ridiculed in the Theaetetus, they were
  incapable of giving a reason of the faith that was in them, and
  had all the animosities of a religious sect. Yet, doubtless,
  there was some first impression derived from external nature,
  which, as in mythology, so also in philosophy, worked upon the
  minds of the first thinkers. Though incapable of induction or
  generalization in the modern sense, they caught an inspiration
  from the external world. The most general facts or appearances of
  nature, the circle of the universe, the nutritive power of water,
  the air which is the breath of life, the destructive force of
  fire, the seeming regularity of the greater part of nature and
  the irregularity of a remnant, the recurrence of day and night
  and of the seasons, the solid earth and the impalpable aether,
  were always present to them.

  The great source of error and also the beginning of truth to them
  was reasoning from analogy; they could see resemblances, but not
  differences; and they were incapable of distinguishing
  illustration from argument. Analogy in modern times only points
  the way, and is immediately verified by experiment. The dreams
  and visions, which pass through the philosopher’s mind, of
  resemblances between different classes of substances, or between
  the animal and vegetable world, are put into the refiner’s fire,
  and the dross and other elements which adhere to them are purged
  away. But the contemporary of Plato and Socrates was incapable of
  resisting the power of any analogy which occurred to him, and was
  drawn into any consequences which seemed to follow. He had no
  methods of difference or of concomitant variations, by the use of
  which he could distinguish the accidental from the essential. He
  could not isolate phenomena, and he was helpless against the
  influence of any word which had an equivocal or double sense.

  Yet without this crude use of analogy the ancient physical
  philosopher would have stood still; he could not have made even
  ‘one guess among many’ without comparison. The course of natural
  phenomena would have passed unheeded before his eyes, like fair
  sights or musical sounds before the eyes and ears of an animal.
  Even the fetichism of the savage is the beginning of reasoning;
  the assumption of the most fanciful of causes indicates a higher
  mental state than the absence of all enquiry about them. The
  tendency to argue from the higher to the lower, from man to the
  world, has led to many errors, but has also had an elevating
  influence on philosophy. The conception of the world as a whole,
  a person, an animal, has been the source of hasty
  generalizations; yet this general grasp of nature led also to a
  spirit of comprehensiveness in early philosophy, which has not
  increased, but rather diminished, as the fields of knowledge have
  become more divided. The modern physicist confines himself to one
  or perhaps two branches of science. But he comparatively seldom
  rises above his own department, and often falls under the
  narrowing influence which any single branch, when pursued to the
  exclusion of every other, has over the mind. Language, two,
  exercised a spell over the beginnings of physical philosophy,
  leading to error and sometimes to truth; for many thoughts were
  suggested by the double meanings of words (Greek), and the
  accidental distinctions of words sometimes led the ancient
  philosopher to make corresponding differences in things (Greek).
  ‘If they are the same, why have they different names; or if they
  are different, why have they the same name?’—is an argument not
  easily answered in the infancy of knowledge. The modern
  philosopher has always been taught the lesson which he still
  imperfectly learns, that he must disengage himself from the
  influence of words. Nor are there wanting in Plato, who was
  himself too often the victim of them, impressive admonitions that
  we should regard not words but things (States.). But upon the
  whole, the ancients, though not entirely dominated by them, were
  much more subject to the influence of words than the moderns.
  They had no clear divisions of colours or substances; even the
  four elements were undefined; the fields of knowledge were not
  parted off. They were bringing order out of disorder, having a
  small grain of experience mingled in a confused heap of a priori
  notions. And yet, probably, their first impressions, the
  illusions and mirages of their fancy, created a greater
  intellectual activity and made a nearer approach to the truth
  than any patient investigation of isolated facts, for which the
  time had not yet come, could have accomplished.

  There was one more illusion to which the ancient philosophers
  were subject, and against which Plato in his later dialogues
  seems to be struggling—the tendency to mere abstractions; not
  perceiving that pure abstraction is only negation, they thought
  that the greater the abstraction the greater the truth. Behind
  any pair of ideas a new idea which comprehended them—the (Greek),
  as it was technically termed—began at once to appear. Two are
  truer than three, one than two. The words ‘being,’ or ‘unity,’ or
  essence,’ or ‘good,’ became sacred to them. They did not see that
  they had a word only, and in one sense the most unmeaning of
  words. They did not understand that the content of notions is in
  inverse proportion to their universality—the element which is the
  most widely diffused is also the thinnest; or, in the language of
  the common logic, the greater the extension the less the
  comprehension. But this vacant idea of a whole without parts, of
  a subject without predicates, a rest without motion, has been
  also the most fruitful of all ideas. It is the beginning of a
  priori thought, and indeed of thinking at all. Men were led to
  conceive it, not by a love of hasty generalization, but by a
  divine instinct, a dialectical enthusiasm, in which the human
  faculties seemed to yearn for enlargement. We know that ‘being’
  is only the verb of existence, the copula, the most general
  symbol of relation, the first and most meagre of abstractions;
  but to some of the ancient philosophers this little word appeared
  to attain divine proportions, and to comprehend all truth. Being
  or essence, and similar words, represented to them a supreme or
  divine being, in which they thought that they found the
  containing and continuing principle of the universe. In a few
  years the human mind was peopled with abstractions; a new world
  was called into existence to give law and order to the old. But
  between them there was still a gulf, and no one could pass from
  the one to the other.

  Number and figure were the greatest instruments of thought which
  were possessed by the Greek philosopher; having the same power
  over the mind which was exerted by abstract ideas, they were also
  capable of practical application. Many curious and, to the early
  thinker, mysterious properties of them came to light when they
  were compared with one another. They admitted of infinite
  multiplication and construction; in Pythagorean triangles or in
  proportions of 1:2:4:8 and 1:3:9:27, or compounds of them, the
  laws of the world seemed to be more than half revealed. They were
  also capable of infinite subdivision—a wonder and also a puzzle
  to the ancient thinker (Rep.). They were not, like being or
  essence, mere vacant abstractions, but admitted of progress and
  growth, while at the same time they confirmed a higher sentiment
  of the mind, that there was order in the universe. And so there
  began to be a real sympathy between the world within and the
  world without. The numbers and figures which were present to the
  mind’s eye became visible to the eye of sense; the truth of
  nature was mathematics; the other properties of objects seemed to
  reappear only in the light of number. Law and morality also found
  a natural expression in number and figure. Instruments of such
  power and elasticity could not fail to be ‘a most gracious
  assistance’ to the first efforts of human intelligence.

  There was another reason why numbers had so great an influence
  over the minds of early thinkers—they were verified by
  experience. Every use of them, even the most trivial, assured men
  of their truth; they were everywhere to be found, in the least
  things and the greatest alike. One, two, three, counted on the
  fingers was a ‘trivial matter (Rep.), a little instrument out of
  which to create a world; but from these and by the help of these
  all our knowledge of nature has been developed. They were the
  measure of all things, and seemed to give law to all things;
  nature was rescued from chaos and confusion by their power; the
  notes of music, the motions of the stars, the forms of atoms, the
  evolution and recurrence of days, months, years, the military
  divisions of an army, the civil divisions of a state, seemed to
  afford a ‘present witness’ of them—what would have become of man
  or of the world if deprived of number (Rep.)? The mystery of
  number and the mystery of music were akin. There was a music of
  rhythm and of harmonious motion everywhere; and to the real
  connexion which existed between music and number, a fanciful or
  imaginary relation was superadded. There was a music of the
  spheres as well as of the notes of the lyre. If in all things
  seen there was number and figure, why should they not also
  pervade the unseen world, with which by their wonderful and
  unchangeable nature they seemed to hold communion?

  Two other points strike us in the use which the ancient
  philosophers made of numbers. First, they applied to external
  nature the relations of them which they found in their own minds;
  and where nature seemed to be at variance with number, as for
  example in the case of fractions, they protested against her
  (Rep.; Arist. Metaph.). Having long meditated on the properties
  of 1:2:4:8, or 1:3:9:27, or of 3, 4, 5, they discovered in them
  many curious correspondences and were disposed to find in them
  the secret of the universe. Secondly, they applied number and
  figure equally to those parts of physics, such as astronomy or
  mechanics, in which the modern philosopher expects to find them,
  and to those in which he would never think of looking for them,
  such as physiology and psychology. For the sciences were not yet
  divided, and there was nothing really irrational in arguing that
  the same laws which regulated the heavenly bodies were partially
  applied to the erring limbs or brain of man. Astrology was the
  form which the lively fancy of ancient thinkers almost
  necessarily gave to astronomy. The observation that the lower
  principle, e.g. mechanics, is always seen in the higher, e.g. in
  the phenomena of life, further tended to perplex them. Plato’s
  doctrine of the same and the other ruling the courses of the
  heavens and of the human body is not a mere vagary, but is a
  natural result of the state of knowledge and thought at which he
  had arrived.

  When in modern times we contemplate the heavens, a certain amount
  of scientific truth imperceptibly blends, even with the cursory
  glance of an unscientific person. He knows that the earth is
  revolving round the sun, and not the sun around the earth. He
  does not imagine the earth to be the centre of the universe, and
  he has some conception of chemistry and the cognate sciences. A
  very different aspect of nature would have been present to the
  mind of the early Greek philosopher. He would have beheld the
  earth a surface only, not mirrored, however faintly, in the glass
  of science, but indissolubly connected with some theory of one,
  two, or more elements. He would have seen the world pervaded by
  number and figure, animated by a principle of motion, immanent in
  a principle of rest. He would have tried to construct the
  universe on a quantitative principle, seeming to find in endless
  combinations of geometrical figures or in the infinite variety of
  their sizes a sufficient account of the multiplicity of
  phenomena. To these a priori speculations he would add a rude
  conception of matter and his own immediate experience of health
  and disease. His cosmos would necessarily be imperfect and
  unequal, being the first attempt to impress form and order on the
  primaeval chaos of human knowledge. He would see all things as in
  a dream.

  The ancient physical philosophers have been charged by Dr.
  Whewell and others with wasting their fine intelligences in wrong
  methods of enquiry; and their progress in moral and political
  philosophy has been sometimes contrasted with their supposed
  failure in physical investigations. ‘They had plenty of ideas,’
  says Dr. Whewell, ‘and plenty of facts; but their ideas did not
  accurately represent the facts with which they were acquainted.’
  This is a very crude and misleading way of describing ancient
  science. It is the mistake of an uneducated person—uneducated,
  that is, in the higher sense of the word—who imagines every one
  else to be like himself and explains every other age by his own.
  No doubt the ancients often fell into strange and fanciful
  errors: the time had not yet arrived for the slower and surer
  path of the modern inductive philosophy. But it remains to be
  shown that they could have done more in their age and country; or
  that the contributions which they made to the sciences with which
  they were acquainted are not as great upon the whole as those
  made by their successors. There is no single step in astronomy as
  great as that of the nameless Pythagorean who first conceived the
  world to be a body moving round the sun in space: there is no
  truer or more comprehensive principle than the application of
  mathematics alike to the heavenly bodies, and to the particles of
  matter. The ancients had not the instruments which would have
  enabled them to correct or verify their anticipations, and their
  opportunities of observation were limited. Plato probably did
  more for physical science by asserting the supremacy of
  mathematics than Aristotle or his disciples by their collections
  of facts. When the thinkers of modern times, following Bacon,
  undervalue or disparage the speculations of ancient philosophers,
  they seem wholly to forget the conditions of the world and of the
  human mind, under which they carried on their investigations.
  When we accuse them of being under the influence of words, do we
  suppose that we are altogether free from this illusion? When we
  remark that Greek physics soon became stationary or extinct, may
  we not observe also that there have been and may be again periods
  in the history of modern philosophy which have been barren and
  unproductive? We might as well maintain that Greek art was not
  real or great, because it had nihil simile aut secundum, as say
  that Greek physics were a failure because they admire no
  subsequent progress.

  The charge of premature generalization which is often urged
  against ancient philosophers is really an anachronism. For they
  can hardly be said to have generalized at all. They may be said
  more truly to have cleared up and defined by the help of
  experience ideas which they already possessed. The beginnings of
  thought about nature must always have this character. A true
  method is the result of many ages of experiment and observation,
  and is ever going on and enlarging with the progress of science
  and knowledge. At first men personify nature, then they form
  impressions of nature, at last they conceive ‘measure’ or laws of
  nature. They pass out of mythology into philosophy. Early science
  is not a process of discovery in the modern sense; but rather a
  process of correcting by observation, and to a certain extent
  only, the first impressions of nature, which mankind, when they
  began to think, had received from poetry or language or
  unintelligent sense. Of all scientific truths the greatest and
  simplest is the uniformity of nature; this was expressed by the
  ancients in many ways, as fate, or necessity, or measure, or
  limit. Unexpected events, of which the cause was unknown to them,
  they attributed to chance (Thucyd.). But their conception of
  nature was never that of law interrupted by exceptions,—a
  somewhat unfortunate metaphysical invention of modern times,
  which is at variance with facts and has failed to satisfy the
  requirements of thought.

Section 3

  Plato’s account of the soul is partly mythical or figurative, and
  partly literal. Not that either he or we can draw a line between
  them, or say, ‘This is poetry, this is philosophy’; for the
  transition from the one to the other is imperceptible. Neither
  must we expect to find in him absolute consistency. He is apt to
  pass from one level or stage of thought to another without always
  making it apparent that he is changing his ground. In such
  passages we have to interpret his meaning by the general spirit
  of his writings. To reconcile his inconsistencies would be
  contrary to the first principles of criticism and fatal to any
  true understanding of him.

  There is a further difficulty in explaining this part of the
  Timaeus—the natural order of thought is inverted. We begin with
  the most abstract, and proceed from the abstract to the concrete.
  We are searching into things which are upon the utmost limit of
  human intelligence, and then of a sudden we fall rather heavily
  to the earth. There are no intermediate steps which lead from one
  to the other. But the abstract is a vacant form to us until
  brought into relation with man and nature. God and the world are
  mere names, like the Being of the Eleatics, unless some human
  qualities are added on to them. Yet the negation has a kind of
  unknown meaning to us. The priority of God and of the world,
  which he is imagined to have created, to all other existences,
  gives a solemn awe to them. And as in other systems of theology
  and philosophy, that of which we know least has the greatest
  interest to us.

  There is no use in attempting to define or explain the first God
  in the Platonic system, who has sometimes been thought to answer
  to God the Father; or the world, in whom the Fathers of the
  Church seemed to recognize ‘the firstborn of every creature.’ Nor
  need we discuss at length how far Plato agrees in the later
  Jewish idea of creation, according to which God made the world
  out of nothing. For his original conception of matter as
  something which has no qualities is really a negation. Moreover
  in the Hebrew Scriptures the creation of the world is described,
  even more explicitly than in the Timaeus, not as a single act,
  but as a work or process which occupied six days. There is a
  chaos in both, and it would be untrue to say that the Greek, any
  more than the Hebrew, had any definite belief in the eternal
  existence of matter. The beginning of things vanished into the
  distance. The real creation began, not with matter, but with
  ideas. According to Plato in the Timaeus, God took of the same
  and the other, of the divided and undivided, of the finite and
  infinite, and made essence, and out of the three combined created
  the soul of the world. To the soul he added a body formed out of
  the four elements. The general meaning of these words is that God
  imparted determinations of thought, or, as we might say, gave law
  and variety to the material universe. The elements are moving in
  a disorderly manner before the work of creation begins; and there
  is an eternal pattern of the world, which, like the ‘idea of
  good,’ is not the Creator himself, but not separable from him.
  The pattern too, though eternal, is a creation, a world of
  thought prior to the world of sense, which may be compared to the
  wisdom of God in the book of Ecclesiasticus, or to the ‘God in
  the form of a globe’ of the old Eleatic philosophers. The
  visible, which already exists, is fashioned in the likeness of
  this eternal pattern. On the other hand, there is no truth of
  which Plato is more firmly convinced than of the priority of the
  soul to the body, both in the universe and in man. So
  inconsistent are the forms in which he describes the works which
  no tongue can utter—his language, as he himself says, partaking
  of his own uncertainty about the things of which he is speaking.

  We may remark in passing, that the Platonic compared with the
  Jewish description of the process of creation has less of freedom
  or spontaneity. The Creator in Plato is still subject to a
  remnant of necessity which he cannot wholly overcome. When his
  work is accomplished he remains in his own nature. Plato is more
  sensible than the Hebrew prophet of the existence of evil, which
  he seeks to put as far as possible out of the way of God. And he
  can only suppose this to be accomplished by God retiring into
  himself and committing the lesser works of creation to inferior
  powers. (Compare, however, Laws for another solution of the
  difficulty.)

  Nor can we attach any intelligible meaning to his words when he
  speaks of the visible being in the image of the invisible. For
  how can that which is divided be like that which is undivided? Or
  that which is changing be the copy of that which is unchanging?
  All the old difficulties about the ideas come back upon us in an
  altered form. We can imagine two worlds, one of which is the mere
  double of the other, or one of which is an imperfect copy of the
  other, or one of which is the vanishing ideal of the other; but
  we cannot imagine an intellectual world which has no qualities—‘a
  thing in itself’—a point which has no parts or magnitude, which
  is nowhere, and nothing. This cannot be the archetype according
  to which God made the world, and is in reality, whether in Plato
  or in Kant, a mere negative residuum of human thought.

  There is another aspect of the same difficulty which appears to
  have no satisfactory solution. In what relation does the
  archetype stand to the Creator himself? For the idea or pattern
  of the world is not the thought of God, but a separate,
  self-existent nature, of which creation is the copy. We can only
  reply, (1) that to the mind of Plato subject and object were not
  yet distinguished; (2) that he supposes the process of creation
  to take place in accordance with his own theory of ideas; and as
  we cannot give a consistent account of the one, neither can we of
  the other. He means (3) to say that the creation of the world is
  not a material process of working with legs and arms, but ideal
  and intellectual; according to his own fine expression, ‘the
  thought of God made the God that was to be.’ He means (4) to draw
  an absolute distinction between the invisible or unchangeable
  which is or is the place of mind or being, and the world of sense
  or becoming which is visible and changing. He means (5) that the
  idea of the world is prior to the world, just as the other ideas
  are prior to sensible objects; and like them may be regarded as
  eternal and self-existent, and also, like the IDEA of good, may
  be viewed apart from the divine mind.

  There are several other questions which we might ask and which
  can receive no answer, or at least only an answer of the same
  kind as the preceding. How can matter be conceived to exist
  without form? Or, how can the essences or forms of things be
  distinguished from the eternal ideas, or essence itself from the
  soul? Or, how could there have been motion in the chaos when as
  yet time was not? Or, how did chaos come into existence, if not
  by the will of the Creator? Or, how could there have been a time
  when the world was not, if time was not? Or, how could the
  Creator have taken portions of an indivisible same? Or, how could
  space or anything else have been eternal when time is only
  created? Or, how could the surfaces of geometrical figures have
  formed solids? We must reply again that we cannot follow Plato in
  all his inconsistencies, but that the gaps of thought are
  probably more apparent to us than to him. He would, perhaps, have
  said that ‘the first things are known only to God and to him of
  men whom God loves.’ How often have the gaps in Theology been
  concealed from the eye of faith! And we may say that only by an
  effort of metaphysical imagination can we hope to understand
  Plato from his own point of view; we must not ask for
  consistency. Everywhere we find traces of the Platonic theory of
  knowledge expressed in an objective form, which by us has to be
  translated into the subjective, before we can attach any meaning
  to it. And this theory is exhibited in so many different points
  of view, that we cannot with any certainty interpret one dialogue
  by another; e.g. the Timaeus by the Parmenides or Phaedrus or
  Philebus.

  The soul of the world may also be conceived as the
  personification of the numbers and figures in which the heavenly
  bodies move. Imagine these as in a Pythagorean dream, stripped of
  qualitative difference and reduced to mathematical abstractions.
  They too conform to the principle of the same, and may be
  compared with the modern conception of laws of nature. They are
  in space, but not in time, and they are the makers of time. They
  are represented as constantly thinking of the same; for thought
  in the view of Plato is equivalent to truth or law, and need not
  imply a human consciousness, a conception which is familiar
  enough to us, but has no place, hardly even a name, in ancient
  Greek philosophy. To this principle of the same is opposed the
  principle of the other—the principle of irregularity and
  disorder, of necessity and chance, which is only partially
  impressed by mathematical laws and figures. (We may observe by
  the way, that the principle of the other, which is the principle
  of plurality and variation in the Timaeus, has nothing in common
  with the ‘other’ of the Sophist, which is the principle of
  determination.) The element of the same dominates to a certain
  extent over the other—the fixed stars keep the ‘wanderers’ of the
  inner circle in their courses, and a similar principle of
  fixedness or order appears to regulate the bodily constitution of
  man. But there still remains a rebellious seed of evil derived
  from the original chaos, which is the source of disorder in the
  world, and of vice and disease in man.

  But what did Plato mean by essence, (Greek), which is the
  intermediate nature compounded of the Same and the Other, and out
  of which, together with these two, the soul of the world is
  created? It is difficult to explain a process of thought so
  strange and unaccustomed to us, in which modern distinctions run
  into one another and are lost sight of. First, let us consider
  once more the meaning of the Same and the Other. The Same is the
  unchanging and indivisible, the heaven of the fixed stars,
  partaking of the divine nature, which, having law in itself,
  gives law to all besides and is the element of order and
  permanence in man and on the earth. It is the rational principle,
  mind regarded as a work, as creation—not as the creator. The old
  tradition of Parmenides and of the Eleatic Being, the foundation
  of so much in the philosophy of Greece and of the world, was
  lingering in Plato’s mind. The Other is the variable or changing
  element, the residuum of disorder or chaos, which cannot be
  reduced to order, nor altogether banished, the source of evil,
  seen in the errors of man and also in the wanderings of the
  planets, a necessity which protrudes through nature. Of this too
  there was a shadow in the Eleatic philosophy in the realm of
  opinion, which, like a mist, seemed to darken the purity of truth
  in itself.—So far the words of Plato may perhaps find an
  intelligible meaning. But when he goes on to speak of the Essence
  which is compounded out of both, the track becomes fainter and we
  can only follow him with hesitating steps. But still we find a
  trace reappearing of the teaching of Anaxagoras: ‘All was
  confusion, and then mind came and arranged things.’ We have
  already remarked that Plato was not acquainted with the modern
  distinction of subject and object, and therefore he sometimes
  confuses mind and the things of mind—(Greek) and (Greek). By
  (Greek) he clearly means some conception of the intelligible and
  the intelligent; it belongs to the class of (Greek). Matter,
  being, the Same, the eternal,—for any of these terms, being
  almost vacant of meaning, is equally suitable to express
  indefinite existence,—are compared or united with the Other or
  Diverse, and out of the union or comparison is elicited the idea
  of intelligence, the ‘One in many,’ brighter than any Promethean
  fire (Phil.), which co-existing with them and so forming a new
  existence, is or becomes the intelligible world...So we may
  perhaps venture to paraphrase or interpret or put into other
  words the parable in which Plato has wrapped up his conception of
  the creation of the world. The explanation may help to fill up
  with figures of speech the void of knowledge.

  The entire compound was divided by the Creator in certain
  proportions and reunited; it was then cut into two strips, which
  were bent into an inner circle and an outer, both moving with an
  uniform motion around a centre, the outer circle containing the
  fixed, the inner the wandering stars. The soul of the world was
  diffused everywhere from the centre to the circumference. To this
  God gave a body, consisting at first of fire and earth, and
  afterwards receiving an addition of air and water; because solid
  bodies, like the world, are always connected by two middle terms
  and not by one. The world was made in the form of a globe, and
  all the material elements were exhausted in the work of creation.

  The proportions in which the soul of the world as well as the
  human soul is divided answer to a series of numbers 1, 2, 3, 4,
  9, 8, 27, composed of the two Pythagorean progressions 1, 2, 4, 8
  and 1, 3, 9, 27, of which the number 1 represents a point, 2 and
  3 lines, 4 and 8, 9 and 27 the squares and cubes respectively of
  2 and 3. This series, of which the intervals are afterwards
  filled up, probably represents (1) the diatonic scale according
  to the Pythagoreans and Plato; (2) the order and distances of the
  heavenly bodies; and (3) may possibly contain an allusion to the
  music of the spheres, which is referred to in the myth at the end
  of the Republic. The meaning of the words that ‘solid bodies are
  always connected by two middle terms’ or mean proportionals has
  been much disputed. The most received explanation is that of
  Martin, who supposes that Plato is only speaking of surfaces and
  solids compounded of prime numbers (i.e. of numbers not made up
  of two factors, or, in other words, only measurable by unity).
  The square of any such number represents a surface, the cube a
  solid. The squares of any two such numbers (e.g. 2 squared, 3
  squared = 4, 9), have always a single mean proportional (e.g. 4
  and 9 have the single mean 6), whereas the cubes of primes (e.g.
  3 cubed and 5 cubed) have always two mean proportionals (e.g.
  27:45:75:125). But to this explanation of Martin’s it may be
  objected, (1) that Plato nowhere says that his proportion is to
  be limited to prime numbers; (2) that the limitation of surfaces
  to squares is also not to be found in his words; nor (3) is there
  any evidence to show that the distinction of prime from other
  numbers was known to him. What Plato chiefly intends to express
  is that a solid requires a stronger bond than a surface; and that
  the double bond which is given by two means is stronger than the
  single bond given by one. Having reflected on the singular
  numerical phenomena of the existence of one mean proportional
  between two square numbers are rather perhaps only between the
  two lowest squares; and of two mean proportionals between two
  cubes, perhaps again confining his attention to the two lowest
  cubes, he finds in the latter symbol an expression of the
  relation of the elements, as in the former an image of the
  combination of two surfaces. Between fire and earth, the two
  extremes, he remarks that there are introduced, not one, but two
  elements, air and water, which are compared to the two mean
  proportionals between two cube numbers. The vagueness of his
  language does not allow us to determine whether anything more
  than this was intended by him.

  Leaving the further explanation of details, which the reader will
  find discussed at length in Boeckh and Martin, we may now return
  to the main argument: Why did God make the world? Like man, he
  must have a purpose; and his purpose is the diffusion of that
  goodness or good which he himself is. The term ‘goodness’ is not
  to be understood in this passage as meaning benevolence or love,
  in the Christian sense of the term, but rather law, order,
  harmony, like the idea of good in the Republic. The ancient
  mythologers, and even the Hebrew prophets, had spoken of the
  jealousy of God; and the Greek had imagined that there was a
  Nemesis always attending the prosperity of mortals. But Plato
  delights to think of God as the author of order in his works,
  who, like a father, lives over again in his children, and can
  never have too much of good or friendship among his creatures.
  Only, as there is a certain remnant of evil inherent in matter
  which he cannot get rid of, he detaches himself from them and
  leaves them to themselves, that he may be guiltless of their
  faults and sufferings.

  Between the ideal and the sensible Plato interposes the two
  natures of time and space. Time is conceived by him to be only
  the shadow or image of eternity which ever is and never has been
  or will be, but is described in a figure only as past or future.
  This is one of the great thoughts of early philosophy, which are
  still as difficult to our minds as they were to the early
  thinkers; or perhaps more difficult, because we more distinctly
  see the consequences which are involved in such an hypothesis.
  All the objections which may be urged against Kant’s doctrine of
  the ideality of space and time at once press upon us. If time is
  unreal, then all which is contained in time is unreal—the
  succession of human thoughts as well as the flux of sensations;
  there is no connecting link between (Greek) and (Greek). Yet, on
  the other hand, we are conscious that knowledge is independent of
  time, that truth is not a thing of yesterday or tomorrow, but an
  ‘eternal now.’ To the ‘spectator of all time and all existence’
  the universe remains at rest. The truths of geometry and
  arithmetic in all their combinations are always the same. The
  generations of men, like the leaves of the forest, come and go,
  but the mathematical laws by which the world is governed remain,
  and seem as if they could never change. The ever-present image of
  space is transferred to time—succession is conceived as
  extension. (We remark that Plato does away with the above and
  below in space, as he has done away with the absolute existence
  of past and future.) The course of time, unless regularly marked
  by divisions of number, partakes of the indefiniteness of the
  Heraclitean flux. By such reflections we may conceive the Greek
  to have attained the metaphysical conception of eternity, which
  to the Hebrew was gained by meditation on the Divine Being. No
  one saw that this objective was really a subjective, and involved
  the subjectivity of all knowledge. ‘Non in tempore sed cum
  tempore finxit Deus mundum,’ says St. Augustine, repeating a
  thought derived from the Timaeus, but apparently unconscious of
  the results to which his doctrine would have led.

  The contradictions involved in the conception of time or motion,
  like the infinitesimal in space, were a source of perplexity to
  the mind of the Greek, who was driven to find a point of view
  above or beyond them. They had sprung up in the decline of the
  Eleatic philosophy and were very familiar to Plato, as we gather
  from the Parmenides. The consciousness of them had led the great
  Eleatic philosopher to describe the nature of God or Being under
  negatives. He sings of ‘Being unbegotten and imperishable,
  unmoved and never-ending, which never was nor will be, but always
  is, one and continuous, which cannot spring from any other; for
  it cannot be said or imagined not to be.’ The idea of eternity
  was for a great part a negation. There are regions of speculation
  in which the negative is hardly separable from the positive, and
  even seems to pass into it. Not only Buddhism, but Greek as well
  as Christian philosophy, show that it is quite possible that the
  human mind should retain an enthusiasm for mere negations. In
  different ages and countries there have been forms of light in
  which nothing could be discerned and which have nevertheless
  exercised a life-giving and illumining power. For the higher
  intelligence of man seems to require, not only something above
  sense, but above knowledge, which can only be described as Mind
  or Being or Truth or God or the unchangeable and eternal element,
  in the expression of which all predicates fail and fall short.
  Eternity or the eternal is not merely the unlimited in time but
  the truest of all Being, the most real of all realities, the most
  certain of all knowledge, which we nevertheless only see through
  a glass darkly. The passionate earnestness of Parmenides
  contrasts with the vacuity of the thought which he is revolving
  in his mind.

  Space is said by Plato to be the ‘containing vessel or nurse of
  generation.’ Reflecting on the simplest kinds of external
  objects, which to the ancients were the four elements, he was led
  to a more general notion of a substance, more or less like
  themselves, out of which they were fashioned. He would not have
  them too precisely distinguished. Thus seems to have arisen the
  first dim perception of (Greek) or matter, which has played so
  great a part in the metaphysical philosophy of Aristotle and his
  followers. But besides the material out of which the elements are
  made, there is also a space in which they are contained. There
  arises thus a second nature which the senses are incapable of
  discerning and which can hardly be referred to the intelligible
  class. For it is and it is not, it is nowhere when filled, it is
  nothing when empty. Hence it is said to be discerned by a kind of
  spurious or analogous reason, partaking so feebly of existence as
  to be hardly perceivable, yet always reappearing as the
  containing mother or nurse of all things. It had not that sort of
  consistency to Plato which has been given to it in modern times
  by geometry and metaphysics. Neither of the Greek words by which
  it is described are so purely abstract as the English word
  ‘space’ or the Latin ‘spatium.’ Neither Plato nor any other Greek
  would have spoken of (Greek) or (Greek) in the same manner as we
  speak of ‘time’ and ‘space.’

  Yet space is also of a very permanent or even eternal nature; and
  Plato seems more willing to admit of the unreality of time than
  of the unreality of space; because, as he says, all things must
  necessarily exist in space. We, on the other hand, are disposed
  to fancy that even if space were annihilated time might still
  survive. He admits indeed that our knowledge of space is of a
  dreamy kind, and is given by a spurious reason without the help
  of sense. (Compare the hypotheses and images of Rep.) It is true
  that it does not attain to the clearness of ideas. But like them
  it seems to remain, even if all the objects contained in it are
  supposed to have vanished away. Hence it was natural for Plato to
  conceive of it as eternal. We must remember further that in his
  attempt to realize either space or matter the two abstract ideas
  of weight and extension, which are familiar to us, had never
  passed before his mind.

  Thus far God, working according to an eternal pattern, out of his
  goodness has created the same, the other, and the essence
  (compare the three principles of the Philebus—the finite, the
  infinite, and the union of the two), and out of them has formed
  the outer circle of the fixed stars and the inner circle of the
  planets, divided according to certain musical intervals; he has
  also created time, the moving image of eternity, and space,
  existing by a sort of necessity and hardly distinguishable from
  matter. The matter out of which the world is formed is not
  absolutely void, but retains in the chaos certain germs or traces
  of the elements. These Plato, like Empedocles, supposed to be
  four in number—fire, air, earth, and water. They were at first
  mixed together; but already in the chaos, before God fashioned
  them by form and number, the greater masses of the elements had
  an appointed place. Into the confusion (Greek) which preceded
  Plato does not attempt further to penetrate. They are called
  elements, but they are so far from being elements (Greek) or
  letters in the higher sense that they are not even syllables or
  first compounds. The real elements are two triangles, the
  rectangular isosceles which has but one form, and the most
  beautiful of the many forms of scalene, which is half of an
  equilateral triangle. By the combination of these triangles which
  exist in an infinite variety of sizes, the surfaces of the four
  elements are constructed.

  That there were only five regular solids was already known to the
  ancients, and out of the surfaces which he has formed Plato
  proceeds to generate the four first of the five. He perhaps
  forgets that he is only putting together surfaces and has not
  provided for their transformation into solids. The first solid is
  a regular pyramid, of which the base and sides are formed by four
  equilateral or twenty-four scalene triangles. Each of the four
  solid angles in this figure is a little larger than the largest
  of obtuse angles. The second solid is composed of the same
  triangles, which unite as eight equilateral triangles, and make
  one solid angle out of four plane angles—six of these angles form
  a regular octahedron. The third solid is a regular icosahedron,
  having twenty triangular equilateral bases, and therefore 120
  rectangular scalene triangles. The fourth regular solid, or cube,
  is formed by the combination of four isosceles triangles into one
  square and of six squares into a cube. The fifth regular solid,
  or dodecahedron, cannot be formed by a combination of either of
  these triangles, but each of its faces may be regarded as
  composed of thirty triangles of another kind. Probably Plato
  notices this as the only remaining regular polyhedron, which from
  its approximation to a globe, and possibly because, as Plutarch
  remarks, it is composed of 12 x 30 = 360 scalene triangles
  (Platon. Quaest.), representing thus the signs and degrees of the
  Zodiac, as well as the months and days of the year, God may be
  said to have ‘used in the delineation of the universe.’ According
  to Plato earth was composed of cubes, fire of regular pyramids,
  air of regular octahedrons, water of regular icosahedrons. The
  stability of the last three increases with the number of their
  sides.

  The elements are supposed to pass into one another, but we must
  remember that these transformations are not the transformations
  of real solids, but of imaginary geometrical figures; in other
  words, we are composing and decomposing the faces of substances
  and not the substances themselves—it is a house of cards which we
  are pulling to pieces and putting together again (compare however
  Laws). Yet perhaps Plato may regard these sides or faces as only
  the forms which are impressed on pre-existent matter. It is
  remarkable that he should speak of each of these solids as a
  possible world in itself, though upon the whole he inclines to
  the opinion that they form one world and not five. To suppose
  that there is an infinite number of worlds, as Democritus
  (Hippolyt. Ref. Haer. I.) had said, would be, as he satirically
  observes, ‘the characteristic of a very indefinite and ignorant
  mind.’

  The twenty triangular faces of an icosahedron form the faces or
  sides of two regular octahedrons and of a regular pyramid (20 = 8
  x 2 + 4); and therefore, according to Plato, a particle of water
  when decomposed is supposed to give two particles of air and one
  of fire. So because an octahedron gives the sides of two pyramids
  (8 = 4 x 2), a particle of air is resolved into two particles of
  fire.

  The transformation is effected by the superior power or number of
  the conquering elements. The manner of the change is (1) a
  separation of portions of the elements from the masses in which
  they are collected; (2) a resolution of them into their original
  triangles; and (3) a reunion of them in new forms. Plato himself
  proposes the question, Why does motion continue at all when the
  elements are settled in their places? He answers that although
  the force of attraction is continually drawing similar elements
  to the same spot, still the revolution of the universe exercises
  a condensing power, and thrusts them again out of their natural
  places. Thus want of uniformity, the condition of motion, is
  produced. In all such disturbances of matter there is an
  alternative for the weaker element: it may escape to its kindred,
  or take the form of the stronger—becoming denser, if it be
  denser, or rarer if rarer. This is true of fire, air, and water,
  which, being composed of similar triangles, are interchangeable;
  earth, however, which has triangles peculiar to itself, is
  capable of dissolution, but not of change. Of the interchangeable
  elements, fire, the rarest, can only become a denser, and water,
  the densest, only a rarer: but air may become a denser or a
  rarer. No single particle of the elements is visible, but only
  the aggregates of them are seen. The subordinate species depend,
  not upon differences of form in the original triangles, but upon
  differences of size. The obvious physical phenomena from which
  Plato has gathered his views of the relations of the elements
  seem to be the effect of fire upon air, water, and earth, and the
  effect of water upon earth. The particles are supposed by him to
  be in a perpetual process of circulation caused by inequality.
  This process of circulation does not admit of a vacuum, as he
  tells us in his strange account of respiration.

  Of the phenomena of light and heavy he speaks afterwards, when
  treating of sensation, but they may be more conveniently
  considered by us in this place. They are not, he says, to be
  explained by ‘above’ and ‘below,’ which in the universal globe
  have no existence, but by the attraction of similars towards the
  great masses of similar substances; fire to fire, air to air,
  water to water, earth to earth. Plato’s doctrine of attraction
  implies not only (1) the attraction of similar elements to one
  another, but also (2) of smaller bodies to larger ones. Had he
  confined himself to the latter he would have arrived, though,
  perhaps, without any further result or any sense of the greatness
  of the discovery, at the modern doctrine of gravitation. He does
  not observe that water has an equal tendency towards both water
  and earth. So easily did the most obvious facts which were
  inconsistent with his theories escape him.

  The general physical doctrines of the Timaeus may be summed up as
  follows: (1) Plato supposes the greater masses of the elements to
  have been already settled in their places at the creation: (2)
  they are four in number, and are formed of rectangular triangles
  variously combined into regular solid figures: (3) three of them,
  fire, air, and water, admit of transformation into one another;
  the fourth, earth, cannot be similarly transformed: (4) different
  sizes of the same triangles form the lesser species of each
  element: (5) there is an attraction of like to like—smaller
  masses of the same kind being drawn towards greater: (6) there is
  no void, but the particles of matter are ever pushing one another
  round and round (Greek). Like the atomists, Plato attributes the
  differences between the elements to differences in geometrical
  figures. But he does not explain the process by which surfaces
  become solids; and he characteristically ridicules Democritus for
  not seeing that the worlds are finite and not infinite.

Section 4

  The astronomy of Plato is based on the two principles of the same
  and the other, which God combined in the creation of the world.
  The soul, which is compounded of the same, the other, and the
  essence, is diffused from the centre to the circumference of the
  heavens. We speak of a soul of the universe; but more truly
  regarded, the universe of the Timaeus is a soul, governed by
  mind, and holding in solution a residuum of matter or evil, which
  the author of the world is unable to expel, and of which Plato
  cannot tell us the origin. The creation, in Plato’s sense, is
  really the creation of order; and the first step in giving order
  is the division of the heavens into an inner and outer circle of
  the other and the same, of the divisible and the indivisible,
  answering to the two spheres, of the planets and of the world
  beyond them, all together moving around the earth, which is their
  centre. To us there is a difficulty in apprehending how that
  which is at rest can also be in motion, or that which is
  indivisible exist in space. But the whole description is so ideal
  and imaginative, that we can hardly venture to attribute to many
  of Plato’s words in the Timaeus any more meaning than to his
  mythical account of the heavens in the Republic and in the
  Phaedrus. (Compare his denial of the ‘blasphemous opinion’ that
  there are planets or wandering stars; all alike move in
  circles—Laws.) The stars are the habitations of the souls of men,
  from which they come and to which they return. In attributing to
  the fixed stars only the most perfect motion—that which is on the
  same spot or circulating around the same—he might perhaps have
  said that to ‘the spectator of all time and all existence,’ to
  borrow once more his own grand expression, or viewed, in the
  language of Spinoza, ‘sub specie aeternitatis,’ they were still
  at rest, but appeared to move in order to teach men the periods
  of time. Although absolutely in motion, they are relatively at
  rest; or we may conceive of them as resting, while the space in
  which they are contained, or the whole anima mundi, revolves.

  The universe revolves around a centre once in twenty-four hours,
  but the orbits of the fixed stars take a different direction from
  those of the planets. The outer and the inner sphere cross one
  another and meet again at a point opposite to that of their first
  contact; the first moving in a circle from left to right along
  the side of a parallelogram which is supposed to be inscribed in
  it, the second also moving in a circle along the diagonal of the
  same parallelogram from right to left; or, in other words, the
  first describing the path of the equator, the second, the path of
  the ecliptic. The motion of the second is controlled by the
  first, and hence the oblique line in which the planets are
  supposed to move becomes a spiral. The motion of the same is said
  to be undivided, whereas the inner motion is split into seven
  unequal orbits—the intervals between them being in the ratio of
  two and three, three of either:—the Sun, moving in the opposite
  direction to Mercury and Venus, but with equal swiftness; the
  remaining four, Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter, with unequal
  swiftness to the former three and to one another. Thus arises the
  following progression:—Moon 1, Sun 2, Venus 3, Mercury 4, Mars 8,
  Jupiter 9, Saturn 27. This series of numbers is the compound of
  the two Pythagorean ratios, having the same intervals, though not
  in the same order, as the mixture which was originally divided in
  forming the soul of the world.

  Plato was struck by the phenomenon of Mercury, Venus, and the Sun
  appearing to overtake and be overtaken by one another. The true
  reason of this, namely, that they lie within the circle of the
  earth’s orbit, was unknown to him, and the reason which he
  gives—that the two former move in an opposite direction to the
  latter—is far from explaining the appearance of them in the
  heavens. All the planets, including the sun, are carried round in
  the daily motion of the circle of the fixed stars, and they have
  a second or oblique motion which gives the explanation of the
  different lengths of the sun’s course in different parts of the
  earth. The fixed stars have also two movements—a forward movement
  in their orbit which is common to the whole circle; and a
  movement on the same spot around an axis, which Plato calls the
  movement of thought about the same. In this latter respect they
  are more perfect than the wandering stars, as Plato himself terms
  them in the Timaeus, although in the Laws he condemns the
  appellation as blasphemous.

  The revolution of the world around earth, which is accomplished
  in a single day and night, is described as being the most perfect
  or intelligent. Yet Plato also speaks of an ‘annus magnus’ or
  cyclical year, in which periods wonderful for their complexity
  are found to coincide in a perfect number, i.e. a number which
  equals the sum of its factors, as 6 = 1 + 2 + 3. This, although
  not literally contradictory, is in spirit irreconcilable with the
  perfect revolution of twenty-four hours. The same remark may be
  applied to the complexity of the appearances and occultations of
  the stars, which, if the outer heaven is supposed to be moving
  around the centre once in twenty-four hours, must be confined to
  the effects produced by the seven planets. Plato seems to confuse
  the actual observation of the heavens with his desire to find in
  them mathematical perfection. The same spirit is carried yet
  further by him in the passage already quoted from the Laws, in
  which he affirms their wanderings to be an appearance only, which
  a little knowledge of mathematics would enable men to correct.

  We have now to consider the much discussed question of the
  rotation or immobility of the earth. Plato’s doctrine on this
  subject is contained in the following words:—‘The earth, which is
  our nurse, compacted (OR revolving) around the pole which is
  extended through the universe, he made to be the guardian and
  artificer of night and day, first and eldest of gods that are in
  the interior of heaven’. There is an unfortunate doubt in this
  passage (1) about the meaning of the word (Greek), which is
  translated either ‘compacted’ or ‘revolving,’ and is equally
  capable of both explanations. A doubt (2) may also be raised as
  to whether the words ‘artificer of day and night’ are consistent
  with the mere passive causation of them, produced by the
  immobility of the earth in the midst of the circling universe. We
  must admit, further, (3) that Aristotle attributed to Plato the
  doctrine of the rotation of the earth on its axis. On the other
  hand it has been urged that if the earth goes round with the
  outer heaven and sun in twenty-four hours, there is no way of
  accounting for the alternation of day and night; since the equal
  motion of the earth and sun would have the effect of absolute
  immobility. To which it may be replied that Plato never says that
  the earth goes round with the outer heaven and sun; although the
  whole question depends on the relation of earth and sun, their
  movements are nowhere precisely described. But if we suppose,
  with Mr. Grote, that the diurnal rotation of the earth on its
  axis and the revolution of the sun and outer heaven precisely
  coincide, it would be difficult to imagine that Plato was unaware
  of the consequence. For though he was ignorant of many things
  which are familiar to us, and often confused in his ideas where
  we have become clear, we have no right to attribute to him a
  childish want of reasoning about very simple facts, or an
  inability to understand the necessary and obvious deductions from
  geometrical figures or movements. Of the causes of day and night
  the pre-Socratic philosophers, and especially the Pythagoreans,
  gave various accounts, and therefore the question can hardly be
  imagined to have escaped him. On the other hand it may be urged
  that the further step, however simple and obvious, is just what
  Plato often seems to be ignorant of, and that as there is no
  limit to his insight, there is also no limit to the blindness
  which sometimes obscures his intelligence (compare the
  construction of solids out of surfaces in his account of the
  creation of the world, or the attraction of similars to
  similars). Further, Mr. Grote supposes, not that (Greek) means
  ‘revolving,’ or that this is the sense in which Aristotle
  understood the word, but that the rotation of the earth is
  necessarily implied in its adherence to the cosmical axis. But
  (a) if, as Mr Grote assumes, Plato did not see that the rotation
  of the earth on its axis and of the sun and outer heavens around
  the earth in equal times was inconsistent with the alternation of
  day and night, neither need we suppose that he would have seen
  the immobility of the earth to be inconsistent with the rotation
  of the axis. And (b) what proof is there that the axis of the
  world revolves at all? (c) The comparison of the two passages
  quoted by Mr Grote (see his pamphlet on ‘The Rotation of the
  Earth’) from Aristotle De Coelo, Book II (Greek) clearly shows,
  although this is a matter of minor importance, that Aristotle, as
  Proclus and Simplicius supposed, understood (Greek) in the
  Timaeus to mean ‘revolving.’ For the second passage, in which
  motion on an axis is expressly mentioned, refers to the first,
  but this would be unmeaning unless (Greek) in the first passage
  meant rotation on an axis. (4) The immobility of the earth is
  more in accordance with Plato’s other writings than the opposite
  hypothesis. For in the Phaedo the earth is described as the
  centre of the world, and is not said to be in motion. In the
  Republic the pilgrims appear to be looking out from the earth
  upon the motions of the heavenly bodies; in the Phaedrus, Hestia,
  who remains immovable in the house of Zeus while the other gods
  go in procession, is called the first and eldest of the gods, and
  is probably the symbol of the earth. The silence of Plato in
  these and in some other passages (Laws) in which he might be
  expected to speak of the rotation of the earth, is more
  favourable to the doctrine of its immobility than to the
  opposite. If he had meant to say that the earth revolves on its
  axis, he would have said so in distinct words, and have explained
  the relation of its movements to those of the other heavenly
  bodies. (5) The meaning of the words ‘artificer of day and night’
  is literally true according to Plato’s view. For the alternation
  of day and night is not produced by the motion of the heavens
  alone, or by the immobility of the earth alone, but by both
  together; and that which has the inherent force or energy to
  remain at rest when all other bodies are moving, may be truly
  said to act, equally with them. (6) We should not lay too much
  stress on Aristotle or the writer De Caelo having adopted the
  other interpretation of the words, although Alexander of
  Aphrodisias thinks that he could not have been ignorant either of
  the doctrine of Plato or of the sense which he intended to give
  to the word (Greek). For the citations of Plato in Aristotle are
  frequently misinterpreted by him; and he seems hardly ever to
  have had in his mind the connection in which they occur. In this
  instance the allusion is very slight, and there is no reason to
  suppose that the diurnal revolution of the heavens was present to
  his mind. Hence we need not attribute to him the error from which
  we are defending Plato.

  After weighing one against the other all these complicated
  probabilities, the final conclusion at which we arrive is that
  there is nearly as much to be said on the one side of the
  question as on the other, and that we are not perfectly certain,
  whether, as Bockh and the majority of commentators, ancient as
  well as modern, are inclined to believe, Plato thought that the
  earth was at rest in the centre of the universe, or, as Aristotle
  and Mr. Grote suppose, that it revolved on its axis. Whether we
  assume the earth to be stationary in the centre of the universe,
  or to revolve with the heavens, no explanation is given of the
  variation in the length of days and nights at different times of
  the year. The relations of the earth and heavens are so
  indistinct in the Timaeus and so figurative in the Phaedo,
  Phaedrus and Republic, that we must give up the hope of
  ascertaining how they were imagined by Plato, if he had any fixed
  or scientific conception of them at all.

Section 5

  The soul of the world is framed on the analogy of the soul of
  man, and many traces of anthropomorphism blend with Plato’s
  highest flights of idealism. The heavenly bodies are endowed with
  thought; the principles of the same and other exist in the
  universe as well as in the human mind. The soul of man is made
  out of the remains of the elements which had been used in
  creating the soul of the world; these remains, however, are
  diluted to the third degree; by this Plato expresses the measure
  of the difference between the soul human and divine. The human
  soul, like the cosmical, is framed before the body, as the mind
  is before the soul of either—this is the order of the divine
  work—and the finer parts of the body, which are more akin to the
  soul, such as the spinal marrow, are prior to the bones and
  flesh. The brain, the containing vessel of the divine part of the
  soul, is (nearly) in the form of a globe, which is the image of
  the gods, who are the stars, and of the universe.

  There is, however, an inconsistency in Plato’s manner of
  conceiving the soul of man; he cannot get rid of the element of
  necessity which is allowed to enter. He does not, like Kant,
  attempt to vindicate for men a freedom out of space and time; but
  he acknowledges him to be subject to the influence of external
  causes, and leaves hardly any place for freedom of the will. The
  lusts of men are caused by their bodily constitution, though they
  may be increased by bad education and bad laws, which implies
  that they may be decreased by good education and good laws. He
  appears to have an inkling of the truth that to the higher nature
  of man evil is involuntary. This is mixed up with the view which,
  while apparently agreeing with it, is in reality the opposite of
  it, that vice is due to physical causes. In the Timaeus, as well
  as in the Laws, he also regards vices and crimes as simply
  involuntary; they are diseases analogous to the diseases of the
  body, and arising out of the same causes. If we draw together the
  opposite poles of Plato’s system, we find that, like Spinoza, he
  combines idealism with fatalism.

  The soul of man is divided by him into three parts, answering
  roughly to the charioteer and steeds of the Phaedrus, and to the
  (Greek) of the Republic and Nicomachean Ethics. First, there is
  the immortal nature of which the brain is the seat, and which is
  akin to the soul of the universe. This alone thinks and knows and
  is the ruler of the whole. Secondly, there is the higher mortal
  soul which, though liable to perturbations of her own, takes the
  side of reason against the lower appetites. The seat of this is
  the heart, in which courage, anger, and all the nobler affections
  are supposed to reside. There the veins all meet; it is their
  centre or house of guard whence they carry the orders of the
  thinking being to the extremities of his kingdom. There is also a
  third or appetitive soul, which receives the commands of the
  immortal part, not immediately but mediately, through the liver,
  which reflects on its surface the admonitions and threats of the
  reason.

  The liver is imagined by Plato to be a smooth and bright
  substance, having a store of sweetness and also of bitterness,
  which reason freely uses in the execution of her mandates. In
  this region, as ancient superstition told, were to be found
  intimations of the future. But Plato is careful to observe that
  although such knowledge is given to the inferior parts of man, it
  requires to be interpreted by the superior. Reason, and not
  enthusiasm, is the true guide of man; he is only inspired when he
  is demented by some distemper or possession. The ancient saying,
  that ‘only a man in his senses can judge of his own actions,’ is
  approved by modern philosophy too. The same irony which appears
  in Plato’s remark, that ‘the men of old time must surely have
  known the gods who were their ancestors, and we should believe
  them as custom requires,’ is also manifest in his account of
  divination.

  The appetitive soul is seated in the belly, and there imprisoned
  like a wild beast, far away from the council chamber, as Plato
  graphically calls the head, in order that the animal passions may
  not interfere with the deliberations of reason. Though the soul
  is said by him to be prior to the body, yet we cannot help seeing
  that it is constructed on the model of the body—the threefold
  division into the rational, passionate, and appetitive
  corresponding to the head, heart and belly. The human soul
  differs from the soul of the world in this respect, that it is
  enveloped and finds its expression in matter, whereas the soul of
  the world is not only enveloped or diffused in matter, but is the
  element in which matter moves. The breath of man is within him,
  but the air or aether of heaven is the element which surrounds
  him and all things.

  Pleasure and pain are attributed in the Timaeus to the suddenness
  of our sensations—the first being a sudden restoration, the
  second a sudden violation, of nature (Phileb.). The sensations
  become conscious to us when they are exceptional. Sight is not
  attended either by pleasure or pain, but hunger and the appeasing
  of hunger are pleasant and painful because they are
  extraordinary.

Section 6

  I shall not attempt to connect the physiological speculations of
  Plato either with ancient or modern medicine. What light I can
  throw upon them will be derived from the comparison of them with
  his general system.

  There is no principle so apparent in the physics of the Timaeus,
  or in ancient physics generally, as that of continuity. The world
  is conceived of as a whole, and the elements are formed into and
  out of one another; the varieties of substances and processes are
  hardly known or noticed. And in a similar manner the human body
  is conceived of as a whole, and the different substances of
  which, to a superficial observer, it appears to be composed—the
  blood, flesh, sinews—like the elements out of which they are
  formed, are supposed to pass into one another in regular order,
  while the infinite complexity of the human frame remains
  unobserved. And diseases arise from the opposite process—when the
  natural proportions of the four elements are disturbed, and the
  secondary substances which are formed out of them, namely, blood,
  flesh, sinews, are generated in an inverse order.

  Plato found heat and air within the human frame, and the blood
  circulating in every part. He assumes in language almost
  unintelligible to us that a network of fire and air envelopes the
  greater part of the body. This outer net contains two lesser
  nets, one corresponding to the stomach, the other to the lungs;
  and the entrance to the latter is forked or divided into two
  passages which lead to the nostrils and to the mouth. In the
  process of respiration the external net is said to find a way in
  and out of the pores of the skin: while the interior of it and
  the lesser nets move alternately into each other. The whole
  description is figurative, as Plato himself implies when he
  speaks of a ‘fountain of fire which we compare to the network of
  a creel.’ He really means by this what we should describe as a
  state of heat or temperature in the interior of the body. The
  ‘fountain of fire’ or heat is also in a figure the circulation of
  the blood. The passage is partly imagination, partly fact.

  He has a singular theory of respiration for which he accounts
  solely by the movement of the air in and out of the body; he does
  not attribute any part of the process to the action of the body
  itself. The air has a double ingress and a double exit, through
  the mouth or nostrils, and through the skin. When exhaled through
  the mouth or nostrils, it leaves a vacuum which is filled up by
  other air finding a way in through the pores, this air being
  thrust out of its place by the exhalation from the mouth and
  nostrils. There is also a corresponding process of inhalation
  through the mouth or nostrils, and of exhalation through the
  pores. The inhalation through the pores appears to take place
  nearly at the same time as the exhalation through the mouth; and
  conversely. The internal fire is in either case the propelling
  cause outwards—the inhaled air, when heated by it, having a
  natural tendency to move out of the body to the place of fire;
  while the impossibility of a vacuum is the propelling cause
  inwards.

  Thus we see that this singular theory is dependent on two
  principles largely employed by Plato in explaining the operations
  of nature, the impossibility of a vacuum and the attraction of
  like to like. To these there has to be added a third principle,
  which is the condition of the action of the other two,—the
  interpenetration of particles in proportion to their density or
  rarity. It is this which enables fire and air to permeate the
  flesh.

  Plato’s account of digestion and the circulation of the blood is
  closely connected with his theory of respiration. Digestion is
  supposed to be effected by the action of the internal fire, which
  in the process of respiration moves into the stomach and minces
  the food. As the fire returns to its place, it takes with it the
  minced food or blood; and in this way the veins are replenished.
  Plato does not enquire how the blood is separated from the
  faeces.

  Of the anatomy and functions of the body he knew very
  little,—e.g. of the uses of the nerves in conveying motion and
  sensation, which he supposed to be communicated by the bones and
  veins; he was also ignorant of the distinction between veins and
  arteries;—the latter term he applies to the vessels which conduct
  air from the mouth to the lungs;—he supposes the lung to be
  hollow and bloodless; the spinal marrow he conceives to be the
  seed of generation; he confuses the parts of the body with the
  states of the body—the network of fire and air is spoken of as a
  bodily organ; he has absolutely no idea of the phenomena of
  respiration, which he attributes to a law of equalization in
  nature, the air which is breathed out displacing other air which
  finds a way in; he is wholly unacquainted with the process of
  digestion. Except the general divisions into the spleen, the
  liver, the belly, and the lungs, and the obvious distinctions of
  flesh, bones, and the limbs of the body, we find nothing that
  reminds us of anatomical facts. But we find much which is derived
  from his theory of the universe, and transferred to man, as there
  is much also in his theory of the universe which is suggested by
  man. The microcosm of the human body is the lesser image of the
  macrocosm. The courses of the same and the other affect both;
  they are made of the same elements and therefore in the same
  proportions. Both are intelligent natures endued with the power
  of self-motion, and the same equipoise is maintained in both. The
  animal is a sort of ‘world’ to the particles of the blood which
  circulate in it. All the four elements entered into the original
  composition of the human frame; the bone was formed out of smooth
  earth; liquids of various kinds pass to and fro; the network of
  fire and air irrigates the veins. Infancy and childhood is the
  chaos or first turbid flux of sense prior to the establishment of
  order; the intervals of time which may be observed in some
  intermittent fevers correspond to the density of the elements.
  The spinal marrow, including the brain, is formed out of the
  finest sorts of triangles, and is the connecting link between
  body and mind. Health is only to be preserved by imitating the
  motions of the world in space, which is the mother and nurse of
  generation. The work of digestion is carried on by the superior
  sharpness of the triangles forming the substances of the human
  body to those which are introduced into it in the shape of food.
  The freshest and acutest forms of triangles are those that are
  found in children, but they become more obtuse with advancing
  years; and when they finally wear out and fall to pieces, old age
  and death supervene.

  As in the Republic, Plato is still the enemy of the purgative
  treatment of physicians, which, except in extreme cases, no man
  of sense will ever adopt. For, as he adds, with an insight into
  the truth, ‘every disease is akin to the nature of the living
  being and is only irritated by stimulants.’ He is of opinion that
  nature should be left to herself, and is inclined to think that
  physicians are in vain (Laws—where he says that warm baths would
  be more beneficial to the limbs of the aged rustic than the
  prescriptions of a not over-wise doctor). If he seems to be
  extreme in his condemnation of medicine and to rely too much on
  diet and exercise, he might appeal to nearly all the best
  physicians of our own age in support of his opinions, who often
  speak to their patients of the worthlessness of drugs. For we
  ourselves are sceptical about medicine, and very unwilling to
  submit to the purgative treatment of physicians. May we not claim
  for Plato an anticipation of modern ideas as about some questions
  of astronomy and physics, so also about medicine? As in the
  Charmides he tells us that the body cannot be cured without the
  soul, so in the Timaeus he strongly asserts the sympathy of soul
  and body; any defect of either is the occasion of the greatest
  discord and disproportion in the other. Here too may be a
  presentiment that in the medicine of the future the
  interdependence of mind and body will be more fully recognized,
  and that the influence of the one over the other may be exerted
  in a manner which is not now thought possible.

Section 7

  In Plato’s explanation of sensation we are struck by the fact
  that he has not the same distinct conception of organs of sense
  which is familiar to ourselves. The senses are not instruments,
  but rather passages, through which external objects strike upon
  the mind. The eye is the aperture through which the stream of
  vision passes, the ear is the aperture through which the
  vibrations of sound pass. But that the complex structure of the
  eye or the ear is in any sense the cause of sight and hearing he
  seems hardly to be aware.

  The process of sight is the most complicated (Rep.), and consists
  of three elements—the light which is supposed to reside within
  the eye, the light of the sun, and the light emitted from
  external objects. When the light of the eye meets the light of
  the sun, and both together meet the light issuing from an
  external object, this is the simple act of sight. When the
  particles of light which proceed from the object are exactly
  equal to the particles of the visual ray which meet them from
  within, then the body is transparent. If they are larger and
  contract the visual ray, a black colour is produced; if they are
  smaller and dilate it, a white. Other phenomena are produced by
  the variety and motion of light. A sudden flash of fire at once
  elicits light and moisture from the eye, and causes a bright
  colour. A more subdued light, on mingling with the moisture of
  the eye, produces a red colour. Out of these elements all other
  colours are derived. All of them are combinations of bright and
  red with white and black. Plato himself tells us that he does not
  know in what proportions they combine, and he is of opinion that
  such knowledge is granted to the gods only. To have seen the
  affinity of them to each other and their connection with light,
  is not a bad basis for a theory of colours. We must remember that
  they were not distinctly defined to his, as they are to our eyes;
  he saw them, not as they are divided in the prism, or
  artificially manufactured for the painter’s use, but as they
  exist in nature, blended and confused with one another.

  We can hardly agree with him when he tells us that smells do not
  admit of kinds. He seems to think that no definite qualities can
  attach to bodies which are in a state of transition or
  evaporation; he also makes the subtle observation that smells
  must be denser than air, though thinner than water, because when
  there is an obstruction to the breathing, air can penetrate, but
  not smell.

  The affections peculiar to the tongue are of various kinds, and,
  like many other affections, are caused by contraction and
  dilation. Some of them are produced by rough, others by
  abstergent, others by inflammatory substances,—these act upon the
  testing instruments of the tongue, and produce a more or less
  disagreeable sensation, while other particles congenial to the
  tongue soften and harmonize them. The instruments of taste reach
  from the tongue to the heart. Plato has a lively sense of the
  manner in which sensation and motion are communicated from one
  part of the body to the other, though he confuses the affections
  with the organs. Hearing is a blow which passes through the ear
  and ends in the region of the liver, being transmitted by means
  of the air, the brain, and the blood to the soul. The swifter
  sound is acute, the sound which moves slowly is grave. A great
  body of sound is loud, the opposite is low. Discord is produced
  by the swifter and slower motions of two sounds, and is converted
  into harmony when the swifter motions begin to pause and are
  overtaken by the slower.

  The general phenomena of sensation are partly internal, but the
  more violent are caused by conflict with external objects.
  Proceeding by a method of superficial observation, Plato remarks
  that the more sensitive parts of the human frame are those which
  are least covered by flesh, as is the case with the head and the
  elbows. Man, if his head had been covered with a thicker pulp of
  flesh, might have been a longer-lived animal than he is, but
  could not have had as quick perceptions. On the other hand, the
  tongue is one of the most sensitive of organs; but then this is
  made, not to be a covering to the bones which contain the marrow
  or source of life, but with an express purpose, and in a separate
  mass.

Section 8

  We have now to consider how far in any of these speculations
  Plato approximated to the discoveries of modern science. The
  modern physical philosopher is apt to dwell exclusively on the
  absurdities of ancient ideas about science, on the haphazard
  fancies and a priori assumptions of ancient teachers, on their
  confusion of facts and ideas, on their inconsistency and
  blindness to the most obvious phenomena. He measures them not by
  what preceded them, but by what has followed them. He does not
  consider that ancient physical philosophy was not a free enquiry,
  but a growth, in which the mind was passive rather than active,
  and was incapable of resisting the impressions which flowed in
  upon it. He hardly allows to the notions of the ancients the
  merit of being the stepping-stones by which he has himself risen
  to a higher knowledge. He never reflects, how great a thing it
  was to have formed a conception, however imperfect, either of the
  human frame as a whole, or of the world as a whole. According to
  the view taken in these volumes the errors of ancient physicists
  were not separable from the intellectual conditions under which
  they lived. Their genius was their own; and they were not the
  rash and hasty generalizers which, since the days of Bacon, we
  have been apt to suppose them. The thoughts of men widened to
  receive experience; at first they seemed to know all things as in
  a dream: after a while they look at them closely and hold them in
  their hands. They begin to arrange them in classes and to connect
  causes with effects. General notions are necessary to the
  apprehension of particular facts, the metaphysical to the
  physical. Before men can observe the world, they must be able to
  conceive it.

  To do justice to the subject, we should consider the physical
  philosophy of the ancients as a whole; we should remember, (1)
  that the nebular theory was the received belief of several of the
  early physicists; (2) that the development of animals out of
  fishes who came to land, and of man out of the animals, was held
  by Anaximander in the sixth century before Christ (Plut. Symp.
  Quaest; Plac. Phil.); (3) that even by Philolaus and the early
  Pythagoreans, the earth was held to be a body like the other
  stars revolving in space around the sun or a central fire; (4)
  that the beginnings of chemistry are discernible in the ‘similar
  particles’ of Anaxagoras. Also they knew or thought (5) that
  there was a sex in plants as well as in animals; (6) they were
  aware that musical notes depended on the relative length or
  tension of the strings from which they were emitted, and were
  measured by ratios of number; (7) that mathematical laws pervaded
  the world; and even qualitative differences were supposed to have
  their origin in number and figure; (8) the annihilation of matter
  was denied by several of them, and the seeming disappearance of
  it held to be a transformation only. For, although one of these
  discoveries might have been supposed to be a happy guess, taken
  together they seem to imply a great advance and almost maturity
  of natural knowledge.

  We should also remember, when we attribute to the ancients hasty
  generalizations and delusions of language, that physical
  philosophy and metaphysical too have been guilty of similar
  fallacies in quite recent times. We by no means distinguish
  clearly between mind and body, between ideas and facts. Have not
  many discussions arisen about the Atomic theory in which a point
  has been confused with a material atom? Have not the natures of
  things been explained by imaginary entities, such as life or
  phlogiston, which exist in the mind only? Has not disease been
  regarded, like sin, sometimes as a negative and necessary,
  sometimes as a positive or malignant principle? The ‘idols’ of
  Bacon are nearly as common now as ever; they are inherent in the
  human mind, and when they have the most complete dominion over
  us, we are least able to perceive them. We recognize them in the
  ancients, but we fail to see them in ourselves.

  Such reflections, although this is not the place in which to
  dwell upon them at length, lead us to take a favourable view of
  the speculations of the Timaeus. We should consider not how much
  Plato actually knew, but how far he has contributed to the
  general ideas of physics, or supplied the notions which, whether
  true or false, have stimulated the minds of later generations in
  the path of discovery. Some of them may seem old-fashioned, but
  may nevertheless have had a great influence in promoting system
  and assisting enquiry, while in others we hear the latest word of
  physical or metaphysical philosophy. There is also an
  intermediate class, in which Plato falls short of the truths of
  modern science, though he is not wholly unacquainted with them.
  (1) To the first class belongs the teleological theory of
  creation. Whether all things in the world can be explained as the
  result of natural laws, or whether we must not admit of
  tendencies and marks of design also, has been a question much
  disputed of late years. Even if all phenomena are the result of
  natural forces, we must admit that there are many things in
  heaven and earth which are as well expressed under the image of
  mind or design as under any other. At any rate, the language of
  Plato has been the language of natural theology down to our own
  time, nor can any description of the world wholly dispense with
  it. The notion of first and second or co-operative causes, which
  originally appears in the Timaeus, has likewise survived to our
  own day, and has been a great peace-maker between theology and
  science. Plato also approaches very near to our doctrine of the
  primary and secondary qualities of matter. (2) Another popular
  notion which is found in the Timaeus, is the feebleness of the
  human intellect—‘God knows the original qualities of things; man
  can only hope to attain to probability.’ We speak in almost the
  same words of human intelligence, but not in the same manner of
  the uncertainty of our knowledge of nature. The reason is that
  the latter is assured to us by experiment, and is not contrasted
  with the certainty of ideal or mathematical knowledge. But the
  ancient philosopher never experimented: in the Timaeus Plato
  seems to have thought that there would be impiety in making the
  attempt; he, for example, who tried experiments in colours would
  ‘forget the difference of the human and divine natures.’ Their
  indefiniteness is probably the reason why he singles them out, as
  especially incapable of being tested by experiment. (Compare the
  saying of Anaxagoras—Sext. Pyrrh.—that since snow is made of
  water and water is black, snow ought to be black.)

  The greatest ‘divination’ of the ancients was the supremacy which
  they assigned to mathematics in all the realms of nature; for in
  all of them there is a foundation of mechanics. Even physiology
  partakes of figure and number; and Plato is not wrong in
  attributing them to the human frame, but in the omission to
  observe how little could be explained by them. Thus we may remark
  in passing that the most fanciful of ancient philosophies is also
  the most nearly verified in fact. The fortunate guess that the
  world is a sum of numbers and figures has been the most fruitful
  of anticipations. The ‘diatonic’ scale of the Pythagoreans and
  Plato suggested to Kepler that the secret of the distances of the
  planets from one another was to be found in mathematical
  proportions. The doctrine that the heavenly bodies all move in a
  circle is known by us to be erroneous; but without such an error
  how could the human mind have comprehended the heavens?
  Astronomy, even in modern times, has made far greater progress by
  the high a priori road than could have been attained by any
  other. Yet, strictly speaking—and the remark applies to ancient
  physics generally—this high a priori road was based upon a
  posteriori grounds. For there were no facts of which the ancients
  were so well assured by experience as facts of number. Having
  observed that they held good in a few instances, they applied
  them everywhere; and in the complexity, of which they were
  capable, found the explanation of the equally complex phenomena
  of the universe. They seemed to see them in the least things as
  well as in the greatest; in atoms, as well as in suns and stars;
  in the human body as well as in external nature. And now a
  favourite speculation of modern chemistry is the explanation of
  qualitative difference by quantitative, which is at present
  verified to a certain extent and may hereafter be of far more
  universal application. What is this but the atoms of Democritus
  and the triangles of Plato? The ancients should not be wholly
  deprived of the credit of their guesses because they were unable
  to prove them. May they not have had, like the animals, an
  instinct of something more than they knew?

  Besides general notions we seem to find in the Timaeus some more
  precise approximations to the discoveries of modern physical
  science. First, the doctrine of equipoise. Plato affirms, almost
  in so many words, that nature abhors a vacuum. Whenever a
  particle is displaced, the rest push and thrust one another until
  equality is restored. We must remember that these ideas were not
  derived from any definite experiment, but were the original
  reflections of man, fresh from the first observation of nature.
  The latest word of modern philosophy is continuity and
  development, but to Plato this is the beginning and foundation of
  science; there is nothing that he is so strongly persuaded of as
  that the world is one, and that all the various existences which
  are contained in it are only the transformations of the same soul
  of the world acting on the same matter. He would have readily
  admitted that out of the protoplasm all things were formed by the
  gradual process of creation; but he would have insisted that mind
  and intelligence—not meaning by this, however, a conscious mind
  or person—were prior to them, and could alone have created them.
  Into the workings of this eternal mind or intelligence he does
  not enter further; nor would there have been any use in
  attempting to investigate the things which no eye has seen nor
  any human language can express.

  Lastly, there remain two points in which he seems to touch great
  discoveries of modern times—the law of gravitation, and the
  circulation of the blood.

  (1) The law of gravitation, according to Plato, is a law, not
  only of the attraction of lesser bodies to larger ones, but of
  similar bodies to similar, having a magnetic power as well as a
  principle of gravitation. He observed that earth, water, and air
  had settled down to their places, and he imagined fire or the
  exterior aether to have a place beyond air. When air seemed to go
  upwards and fire to pierce through air—when water and earth fell
  downward, they were seeking their native elements. He did not
  remark that his own explanation did not suit all phenomena; and
  the simpler explanation, which assigns to bodies degrees of
  heaviness and lightness proportioned to the mass and distance of
  the bodies which attract them, never occurred to him. Yet the
  affinities of similar substances have some effect upon the
  composition of the world, and of this Plato may be thought to
  have had an anticipation. He may be described as confusing the
  attraction of gravitation with the attraction of cohesion. The
  influence of such affinities and the chemical action of one body
  upon another in long periods of time have become a recognized
  principle of geology.

  (2) Plato is perfectly aware—and he could hardly be ignorant—that
  blood is a fluid in constant motion. He also knew that blood is
  partly a solid substance consisting of several elements, which,
  as he might have observed in the use of ‘cupping-glasses’,
  decompose and die, when no longer in motion. But the specific
  discovery that the blood flows out on one side of the heart
  through the arteries and returns through the veins on the other,
  which is commonly called the circulation of the blood, was
  absolutely unknown to him.

  A further study of the Timaeus suggests some after-thoughts which
  may be conveniently brought together in this place. The topics
  which I propose briefly to reconsider are (a) the relation of the
  Timaeus to the other dialogues of Plato and to the previous
  philosophy; (b) the nature of God and of creation (c) the
  morality of the Timaeus:—

  (a) The Timaeus is more imaginative and less scientific than any
  other of the Platonic dialogues. It is conjectural astronomy,
  conjectural natural philosophy, conjectural medicine. The writer
  himself is constantly repeating that he is speaking what is
  probable only. The dialogue is put into the mouth of Timaeus, a
  Pythagorean philosopher, and therefore here, as in the
  Parmenides, we are in doubt how far Plato is expressing his own
  sentiments. Hence the connexion with the other dialogues is
  comparatively slight. We may fill up the lacunae of the Timaeus
  by the help of the Republic or Phaedrus: we may identify the same
  and other with the (Greek) of the Philebus. We may find in the
  Laws or in the Statesman parallels with the account of creation
  and of the first origin of man. It would be possible to frame a
  scheme in which all these various elements might have a place.
  But such a mode of proceeding would be unsatisfactory, because we
  have no reason to suppose that Plato intended his scattered
  thoughts to be collected in a system. There is a common spirit in
  his writings, and there are certain general principles, such as
  the opposition of the sensible and intellectual, and the priority
  of mind, which run through all of them; but he has no definite
  forms of words in which he consistently expresses himself. While
  the determinations of human thought are in process of creation he
  is necessarily tentative and uncertain. And there is least of
  definiteness, whenever either in describing the beginning or the
  end of the world, he has recourse to myths. These are not the
  fixed modes in which spiritual truths are revealed to him, but
  the efforts of imagination, by which at different times and in
  various manners he seeks to embody his conceptions. The clouds of
  mythology are still resting upon him, and he has not yet pierced
  ‘to the heaven of the fixed stars’ which is beyond them. It is
  safer then to admit the inconsistencies of the Timaeus, or to
  endeavour to fill up what is wanting from our own imagination,
  inspired by a study of the dialogue, than to refer to other
  Platonic writings,—and still less should we refer to the
  successors of Plato,—for the elucidation of it.

  More light is thrown upon the Timaeus by a comparison of the
  previous philosophies. For the physical science of the ancients
  was traditional, descending through many generations of Ionian
  and Pythagorean philosophers. Plato does not look out upon the
  heavens and describe what he sees in them, but he builds upon the
  foundations of others, adding something out of the ‘depths of his
  own self-consciousness.’ Socrates had already spoken of God the
  creator, who made all things for the best. While he ridiculed the
  superficial explanations of phenomena which were current in his
  age, he recognised the marks both of benevolence and of design in
  the frame of man and in the world. The apparatus of winds and
  waters is contemptuously rejected by him in the Phaedo, but he
  thinks that there is a power greater than that of any Atlas in
  the ‘Best’ (Phaedo; Arist. Met.). Plato, following his master,
  affirms this principle of the best, but he acknowledges that the
  best is limited by the conditions of matter. In the generation
  before Socrates, Anaxagoras had brought together ‘Chaos’ and
  ‘Mind’; and these are connected by Plato in the Timaeus, but in
  accordance with his own mode of thinking he has interposed
  between them the idea or pattern according to which mind worked.
  The circular impulse (Greek) of the one philosopher answers to
  the circular movement (Greek) of the other. But unlike
  Anaxagoras, Plato made the sun and stars living beings and not
  masses of earth or metal. The Pythagoreans again had framed a
  world out of numbers, which they constructed into figures. Plato
  adopted their speculations and improved upon them by a more exact
  knowledge of geometry. The Atomists too made the world, if not
  out of geometrical figures, at least out of different forms of
  atoms, and these atoms resembled the triangles of Plato in being
  too small to be visible. But though the physiology of the Timaeus
  is partly borrowed from them, they are either ignored by Plato or
  referred to with a secret contempt and dislike. He looks with
  more favour on the Pythagoreans, whose intervals of number
  applied to the distances of the planets reappear in the Timaeus.
  It is probable that among the Pythagoreans living in the fourth
  century B.C., there were already some who, like Plato, made the
  earth their centre. Whether he obtained his circles of the Same
  and Other from any previous thinker is uncertain. The four
  elements are taken from Empedocles; the interstices of the
  Timaeus may also be compared with his (Greek). The passage of one
  element into another is common to Heracleitus and several of the
  Ionian philosophers. So much of a syncretist is Plato, though not
  after the manner of the Neoplatonists. For the elements which he
  borrows from others are fused and transformed by his own genius.
  On the other hand we find fewer traces in Plato of early Ionic or
  Eleatic speculation. He does not imagine the world of sense to be
  made up of opposites or to be in a perpetual flux, but to vary
  within certain limits which are controlled by what he calls the
  principle of the same. Unlike the Eleatics, who relegated the
  world to the sphere of not-being, he admits creation to have an
  existence which is real and even eternal, although dependent on
  the will of the creator. Instead of maintaining the doctrine that
  the void has a necessary place in the existence of the world, he
  rather affirms the modern thesis that nature abhors a vacuum, as
  in the Sophist he also denies the reality of not-being (Aristot.
  Metaph.). But though in these respects he differs from them, he
  is deeply penetrated by the spirit of their philosophy; he
  differs from them with reluctance, and gladly recognizes the
  ‘generous depth’ of Parmenides (Theaet.).

  There is a similarity between the Timaeus and the fragments of
  Philolaus, which by some has been thought to be so great as to
  create a suspicion that they are derived from it. Philolaus is
  known to us from the Phaedo of Plato as a Pythagorean philosopher
  residing at Thebes in the latter half of the fifth century B.C.,
  after the dispersion of the original Pythagorean society. He was
  the teacher of Simmias and Cebes, who became disciples of
  Socrates. We have hardly any other information about him. The
  story that Plato had purchased three books of his writings from a
  relation is not worth repeating; it is only a fanciful way in
  which an ancient biographer dresses up the fact that there was
  supposed to be a resemblance between the two writers. Similar
  gossiping stories are told about the sources of the Republic and
  the Phaedo. That there really existed in antiquity a work passing
  under the name of Philolaus there can be no doubt. Fragments of
  this work are preserved to us, chiefly in Stobaeus, a few in
  Boethius and other writers. They remind us of the Timaeus, as
  well as of the Phaedrus and Philebus. When the writer says (Stob.
  Eclog.) that all things are either finite (definite) or infinite
  (indefinite), or a union of the two, and that this antithesis and
  synthesis pervades all art and nature, we are reminded of the
  Philebus. When he calls the centre of the world (Greek), we have
  a parallel to the Phaedrus. His distinction between the world of
  order, to which the sun and moon and the stars belong, and the
  world of disorder, which lies in the region between the moon and
  the earth, approximates to Plato’s sphere of the Same and of the
  Other. Like Plato (Tim.), he denied the above and below in space,
  and said that all things were the same in relation to a centre.
  He speaks also of the world as one and indestructible: ‘for
  neither from within nor from without does it admit of
  destruction’ (Tim). He mentions ten heavenly bodies, including
  the sun and moon, the earth and the counter-earth (Greek), and in
  the midst of them all he places the central fire, around which
  they are moving—this is hidden from the earth by the
  counter-earth. Of neither is there any trace in Plato, who makes
  the earth the centre of his system. Philolaus magnifies the
  virtues of particular numbers, especially of the number 10 (Stob.
  Eclog.), and descants upon odd and even numbers, after the manner
  of the later Pythagoreans. It is worthy of remark that these
  mystical fancies are nowhere to be found in the writings of
  Plato, although the importance of number as a form and also an
  instrument of thought is ever present to his mind. Both Philolaus
  and Plato agree in making the world move in certain numerical
  ratios according to a musical scale: though Bockh is of opinion
  that the two scales, of Philolaus and of the Timaeus, do not
  correspond...We appear not to be sufficiently acquainted with the
  early Pythagoreans to know how far the statements contained in
  these fragments corresponded with their doctrines; and we
  therefore cannot pronounce, either in favour of the genuineness
  of the fragments, with Bockh and Zeller, or, with Valentine Rose
  and Schaarschmidt, against them. But it is clear that they throw
  but little light upon the Timaeus, and that their resemblance to
  it has been exaggerated.

  That there is a degree of confusion and indistinctness in Plato’s
  account both of man and of the universe has been already
  acknowledged. We cannot tell (nor could Plato himself have told)
  where the figure or myth ends and the philosophical truth begins;
  we cannot explain (nor could Plato himself have explained to us)
  the relation of the ideas to appearance, of which one is the copy
  of the other, and yet of all things in the world they are the
  most opposed and unlike. This opposition is presented to us in
  many forms, as the antithesis of the one and many, of the finite
  and infinite, of the intelligible and sensible, of the
  unchangeable and the changing, of the indivisible and the
  divisible, of the fixed stars and the planets, of the creative
  mind and the primeval chaos. These pairs of opposites are so many
  aspects of the great opposition between ideas and phenomena—they
  easily pass into one another; and sometimes the two members of
  the relation differ in kind, sometimes only in degree. As in
  Aristotle’s matter and form the connexion between them is really
  inseparable; for if we attempt to separate them they become
  devoid of content and therefore indistinguishable; there is no
  difference between the idea of which nothing can be predicated,
  and the chaos or matter which has no perceptible
  qualities—between Being in the abstract and Nothing. Yet we are
  frequently told that the one class of them is the reality and the
  other appearance; and one is often spoken of as the double or
  reflection of the other. For Plato never clearly saw that both
  elements had an equal place in mind and in nature; and hence,
  especially when we argue from isolated passages in his writings,
  or attempt to draw what appear to us to be the natural inferences
  from them, we are full of perplexity. There is a similar
  confusion about necessity and free-will, and about the state of
  the soul after death. Also he sometimes supposes that God is
  immanent in the world, sometimes that he is transcendent. And
  having no distinction of objective and subjective, he passes
  imperceptibly from one to the other; from intelligence to soul,
  from eternity to time. These contradictions may be softened or
  concealed by a judicious use of language, but they cannot be
  wholly got rid of. That an age of intellectual transition must
  also be one of inconsistency; that the creative is opposed to the
  critical or defining habit of mind or time, has been often
  repeated by us. But, as Plato would say, ‘there is no harm in
  repeating twice or thrice’ (Laws) what is important for the
  understanding of a great author.

  It has not, however, been observed, that the confusion partly
  arises out of the elements of opposing philosophies which are
  preserved in him. He holds these in solution, he brings them into
  relation with one another, but he does not perfectly harmonize
  them. They are part of his own mind, and he is incapable of
  placing himself outside of them and criticizing them. They grow
  as he grows; they are a kind of composition with which his own
  philosophy is overlaid. In early life he fancies that he has
  mastered them: but he is also mastered by them; and in language
  (Sophist) which may be compared with the hesitating tone of the
  Timaeus, he confesses in his later years that they are full of
  obscurity to him. He attributes new meanings to the words of
  Parmenides and Heracleitus; but at times the old Eleatic
  philosophy appears to go beyond him; then the world of phenomena
  disappears, but the doctrine of ideas is also reduced to
  nothingness. All of them are nearer to one another than they
  themselves supposed, and nearer to him than he supposed. All of
  them are antagonistic to sense and have an affinity to number and
  measure and a presentiment of ideas. Even in Plato they still
  retain their contentious or controversial character, which was
  developed by the growth of dialectic. He is never able to
  reconcile the first causes of the pre-Socratic philosophers with
  the final causes of Socrates himself. There is no intelligible
  account of the relation of numbers to the universal ideas, or of
  universals to the idea of good. He found them all three, in the
  Pythagorean philosophy and in the teaching of Socrates and of the
  Megarians respectively; and, because they all furnished modes of
  explaining and arranging phenomena, he is unwilling to give up
  any of them, though he is unable to unite them in a consistent
  whole.

  Lastly, Plato, though an idealist philosopher, is Greek and not
  Oriental in spirit and feeling. He is no mystic or ascetic; he is
  not seeking in vain to get rid of matter or to find absorption in
  the divine nature, or in the Soul of the universe. And therefore
  we are not surprised to find that his philosophy in the Timaeus
  returns at last to a worship of the heavens, and that to him, as
  to other Greeks, nature, though containing a remnant of evil, is
  still glorious and divine. He takes away or drops the veil of
  mythology, and presents her to us in what appears to him to be
  the form-fairer and truer far—of mathematical figures. It is this
  element in the Timaeus, no less than its affinity to certain
  Pythagorean speculations, which gives it a character not wholly
  in accordance with the other dialogues of Plato.

  (b) The Timaeus contains an assertion perhaps more distinct than
  is found in any of the other dialogues (Rep.; Laws) of the
  goodness of God. ‘He was good himself, and he fashioned the good
  everywhere.’ He was not ‘a jealous God,’ and therefore he desired
  that all other things should be equally good. He is the IDEA of
  good who has now become a person, and speaks and is spoken of as
  God. Yet his personality seems to appear only in the act of
  creation. In so far as he works with his eye fixed upon an
  eternal pattern he is like the human artificer in the Republic.
  Here the theory of Platonic ideas intrudes upon us. God, like
  man, is supposed to have an ideal of which Plato is unable to
  tell us the origin. He may be said, in the language of modern
  philosophy, to resolve the divine mind into subject and object.

  The first work of creation is perfected, the second begins under
  the direction of inferior ministers. The supreme God is withdrawn
  from the world and returns to his own accustomed nature (Tim.).
  As in the Statesman, he retires to his place of view. So early
  did the Epicurean doctrine take possession of the Greek mind, and
  so natural is it to the heart of man, when he has once passed out
  of the stage of mythology into that of rational religion. For he
  sees the marks of design in the world; but he no longer sees or
  fancies that he sees God walking in the garden or haunting stream
  or mountain. He feels also that he must put God as far as
  possible out of the way of evil, and therefore he banishes him
  from an evil world. Plato is sensible of the difficulty; and he
  often shows that he is desirous of justifying the ways of God to
  man. Yet on the other hand, in the Tenth Book of the Laws he
  passes a censure on those who say that the Gods have no care of
  human things.

  The creation of the world is the impression of order on a
  previously existing chaos. The formula of Anaxagoras—‘all things
  were in chaos or confusion, and then mind came and disposed
  them’—is a summary of the first part of the Timaeus. It is true
  that of a chaos without differences no idea could be formed. All
  was not mixed but one; and therefore it was not difficult for the
  later Platonists to draw inferences by which they were enabled to
  reconcile the narrative of the Timaeus with the Mosaic account of
  the creation. Neither when we speak of mind or intelligence, do
  we seem to get much further in our conception than circular
  motion, which was deemed to be the most perfect. Plato, like
  Anaxagoras, while commencing his theory of the universe with
  ideas of mind and of the best, is compelled in the execution of
  his design to condescend to the crudest physics.

  (c) The morality of the Timaeus is singular, and it is difficult
  to adjust the balance between the two elements of it. The
  difficulty which Plato feels, is that which all of us feel, and
  which is increased in our own day by the progress of physical
  science, how the responsibility of man is to be reconciled with
  his dependence on natural causes. And sometimes, like other men,
  he is more impressed by one aspect of human life, sometimes by
  the other. In the Republic he represents man as freely choosing
  his own lot in a state prior to birth—a conception which, if
  taken literally, would still leave him subject to the dominion of
  necessity in his after life; in the Statesman he supposes the
  human race to be preserved in the world only by a divine
  interposition; while in the Timaeus the supreme God commissions
  the inferior deities to avert from him all but self-inflicted
  evils—words which imply that all the evils of men are really
  self-inflicted. And here, like Plato (the insertion of a note in
  the text of an ancient writer is a literary curiosity worthy of
  remark), we may take occasion to correct an error. For we too
  hastily said that Plato in the Timaeus regarded all ‘vices and
  crimes as involuntary.’ But the fact is that he is inconsistent
  with himself; in one and the same passage vice is attributed to
  the relaxation of the bodily frame, and yet we are exhorted to
  avoid it and pursue virtue. It is also admitted that good and
  evil conduct are to be attributed respectively to good and evil
  laws and institutions. These cannot be given by individuals to
  themselves; and therefore human actions, in so far as they are
  dependent upon them, are regarded by Plato as involuntary rather
  than voluntary. Like other writers on this subject, he is unable
  to escape from some degree of self-contradiction. He had learned
  from Socrates that vice is ignorance, and suddenly the doctrine
  seems to him to be confirmed by observing how much of the good
  and bad in human character depends on the bodily constitution. So
  in modern times the speculative doctrine of necessity has often
  been supported by physical facts.

  The Timaeus also contains an anticipation of the stoical life
  according to nature. Man contemplating the heavens is to regulate
  his erring life according to them. He is to partake of the repose
  of nature and of the order of nature, to bring the variable
  principle in himself into harmony with the principle of the same.
  The ethics of the Timaeus may be summed up in the single idea of
  ‘law.’ To feel habitually that he is part of the order of the
  universe, is one of the highest ethical motives of which man is
  capable. Something like this is what Plato means when he speaks
  of the soul ‘moving about the same in unchanging thought of the
  same.’ He does not explain how man is acted upon by the lesser
  influences of custom or of opinion; or how the commands of the
  soul watching in the citadel are conveyed to the bodily organs.
  But this perhaps, to use once more expressions of his own, ‘is
  part of another subject’ or ‘may be more suitably discussed on
  some other occasion.’

  There is no difficulty, by the help of Aristotle and later
  writers, in criticizing the Timaeus of Plato, in pointing out the
  inconsistencies of the work, in dwelling on the ignorance of
  anatomy displayed by the author, in showing the fancifulness or
  unmeaningness of some of his reasons. But the Timaeus still
  remains the greatest effort of the human mind to conceive the
  world as a whole which the genius of antiquity has bequeathed to
  us.

  One more aspect of the Timaeus remains to be considered—the
  mythological or geographical. Is it not a wonderful thing that a
  few pages of one of Plato’s dialogues have grown into a great
  legend, not confined to Greece only, but spreading far and wide
  over the nations of Europe and reaching even to Egypt and Asia?
  Like the tale of Troy, or the legend of the Ten Tribes (Ewald,
  Hist. of Isr.), which perhaps originated in a few verses of II
  Esdras, it has become famous, because it has coincided with a
  great historical fact. Like the romance of King Arthur, which has
  had so great a charm, it has found a way over the seas from one
  country and language to another. It inspired the navigators of
  the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries; it foreshadowed the
  discovery of America. It realized the fiction so natural to the
  human mind, because it answered the enquiry about the origin of
  the arts, that there had somewhere existed an ancient primitive
  civilization. It might find a place wherever men chose to look
  for it; in North, South, East, or West; in the Islands of the
  Blest; before the entrance of the Straits of Gibraltar, in Sweden
  or in Palestine. It mattered little whether the description in
  Plato agreed with the locality assigned to it or not. It was a
  legend so adapted to the human mind that it made a habitation for
  itself in any country. It was an island in the clouds, which
  might be seen anywhere by the eye of faith. It was a subject
  especially congenial to the ponderous industry of certain French
  and Swedish writers, who delighted in heaping up learning of all
  sorts but were incapable of using it.

  M. Martin has written a valuable dissertation on the opinions
  entertained respecting the Island of Atlantis in ancient and
  modern times. It is a curious chapter in the history of the human
  mind. The tale of Atlantis is the fabric of a vision, but it has
  never ceased to interest mankind. It was variously regarded by
  the ancients themselves. The stronger heads among them, like
  Strabo and Longinus, were as little disposed to believe in the
  truth of it as the modern reader in Gulliver or Robinson Crusoe.
  On the other hand there is no kind or degree of absurdity or
  fancy in which the more foolish writers, both of antiquity and of
  modern times, have not indulged respecting it. The
  Neo-Platonists, loyal to their master, like some commentators on
  the Christian Scriptures, sought to give an allegorical meaning
  to what they also believed to be an historical fact. It was as if
  some one in our own day were to convert the poems of Homer into
  an allegory of the Christian religion, at the same time
  maintaining them to be an exact and veritable history. In the
  Middle Ages the legend seems to have been half-forgotten until
  revived by the discovery of America. It helped to form the Utopia
  of Sir Thomas More and the New Atlantis of Bacon, although
  probably neither of those great men were at all imposed upon by
  the fiction. It was most prolific in the seventeenth or in the
  early part of the eighteenth century, when the human mind,
  seeking for Utopias or inventing them, was glad to escape out of
  the dulness of the present into the romance of the past or some
  ideal of the future. The later forms of such narratives contained
  features taken from the Edda, as well as from the Old and New
  Testament; also from the tales of missionaries and the
  experiences of travellers and of colonists.

  The various opinions respecting the Island of Atlantis have no
  interest for us except in so far as they illustrate the
  extravagances of which men are capable. But this is a real
  interest and a serious lesson, if we remember that now as
  formerly the human mind is liable to be imposed upon by the
  illusions of the past, which are ever assuming some new form.

  When we have shaken off the rubbish of ages, there remain one or
  two questions of which the investigation has a permanent value:—

  1. Did Plato derive the legend of Atlantis from an Egyptian
  source? It may be replied that there is no such legend in any
  writer previous to Plato; neither in Homer, nor in Pindar, nor in
  Herodotus is there any mention of an Island of Atlantis, nor any
  reference to it in Aristotle, nor any citation of an earlier
  writer by a later one in which it is to be found. Nor have any
  traces been discovered hitherto in Egyptian monuments of a
  connexion between Greece and Egypt older than the eighth or ninth
  century B.C. It is true that Proclus, writing in the fifth
  century after Christ, tells us of stones and columns in Egypt on
  which the history of the Island of Atlantis was engraved. The
  statement may be false—there are similar tales about columns set
  up ‘by the Canaanites whom Joshua drove out’ (Procop.); but even
  if true, it would only show that the legend, 800 years after the
  time of Plato, had been transferred to Egypt, and inscribed, not,
  like other forgeries, in books, but on stone. Probably in the
  Alexandrian age, when Egypt had ceased to have a history and
  began to appropriate the legends of other nations, many such
  monuments were to be found of events which had become famous in
  that or other countries. The oldest witness to the story is said
  to be Crantor, a Stoic philosopher who lived a generation later
  than Plato, and therefore may have borrowed it from him. The
  statement is found in Proclus; but we require better assurance
  than Proclus can give us before we accept this or any other
  statement which he makes.

  Secondly, passing from the external to the internal evidence, we
  may remark that the story is far more likely to have been
  invented by Plato than to have been brought by Solon from Egypt.
  That is another part of his legend which Plato also seeks to
  impose upon us. The verisimilitude which he has given to the tale
  is a further reason for suspecting it; for he could easily
  ‘invent Egyptian or any other tales’ (Phaedrus). Are not the
  words, ‘The truth of the story is a great advantage,’ if we read
  between the lines, an indication of the fiction? It is only a
  legend that Solon went to Egypt, and if he did he could not have
  conversed with Egyptian priests or have read records in their
  temples. The truth is that the introduction is a mosaic work of
  small touches which, partly by their minuteness, and also by
  their seeming probability, win the confidence of the reader. Who
  would desire better evidence than that of Critias, who had heard
  the narrative in youth when the memory is strongest at the age of
  ten from his grandfather Critias, an old man of ninety, who in
  turn had heard it from Solon himself? Is not the famous
  expression—‘You Hellenes are ever children and there is no
  knowledge among you hoary with age,’ really a compliment to the
  Athenians who are described in these words as ‘ever young’? And
  is the thought expressed in them to be attributed to the learning
  of the Egyptian priest, and not rather to the genius of Plato? Or
  when the Egyptian says—‘Hereafter at our leisure we will take up
  the written documents and examine in detail the exact truth about
  these things’—what is this but a literary trick by which Plato
  sets off his narrative? Could any war between Athens and the
  Island of Atlantis have really coincided with the struggle
  between the Greeks and Persians, as is sufficiently hinted though
  not expressly stated in the narrative of Plato? And whence came
  the tradition to Egypt? or in what does the story consist except
  in the war between the two rival powers and the submersion of
  both of them? And how was the tale transferred to the poem of
  Solon? ‘It is not improbable,’ says Mr. Grote, ‘that Solon did
  leave an unfinished Egyptian poem’ (Plato). But are probabilities
  for which there is not a tittle of evidence, and which are
  without any parallel, to be deemed worthy of attention by the
  critic? How came the poem of Solon to disappear in antiquity? or
  why did Plato, if the whole narrative was known to him, break off
  almost at the beginning of it?

  While therefore admiring the diligence and erudition of M.
  Martin, we cannot for a moment suppose that the tale was told to
  Solon by an Egyptian priest, nor can we believe that Solon wrote
  a poem upon the theme which was thus suggested to him—a poem
  which disappeared in antiquity; or that the Island of Atlantis or
  the antediluvian Athens ever had any existence except in the
  imagination of Plato. Martin is of opinion that Plato would have
  been terrified if he could have foreseen the endless fancies to
  which his Island of Atlantis has given occasion. Rather he would
  have been infinitely amused if he could have known that his gift
  of invention would have deceived M. Martin himself into the
  belief that the tradition was brought from Egypt by Solon and
  made the subject of a poem by him. M. Martin may also be gently
  censured for citing without sufficient discrimination ancient
  authors having very different degrees of authority and value.

  2. It is an interesting and not unimportant question which is
  touched upon by Martin, whether the Atlantis of Plato in any
  degree held out a guiding light to the early navigators. He is
  inclined to think that there is no real connexion between them.
  But surely the discovery of the New World was preceded by a
  prophetic anticipation of it, which, like the hope of a Messiah,
  was entering into the hearts of men? And this hope was nursed by
  ancient tradition, which had found expression from time to time
  in the celebrated lines of Seneca and in many other places. This
  tradition was sustained by the great authority of Plato, and
  therefore the legend of the Island of Atlantis, though not
  closely connected with the voyages of the early navigators, may
  be truly said to have contributed indirectly to the great
  discovery.

  The Timaeus of Plato, like the Protagoras and several portions of
  the Phaedrus and Republic, was translated by Cicero into Latin.
  About a fourth, comprehending with lacunae the first portion of
  the dialogue, is preserved in several MSS. These generally agree,
  and therefore may be supposed to be derived from a single
  original. The version is very faithful, and is a remarkable
  monument of Cicero’s skill in managing the difficult and
  intractable Greek. In his treatise De Natura Deorum, he also
  refers to the Timaeus, which, speaking in the person of Velleius
  the Epicurean, he severely criticises.

  The commentary of Proclus on the Timaeus is a wonderful monument
  of the silliness and prolixity of the Alexandrian Age. It extends
  to about thirty pages of the book, and is thirty times the length
  of the original. It is surprising that this voluminous work
  should have found a translator (Thomas Taylor, a kindred spirit,
  who was himself a Neo-Platonist, after the fashion, not of the
  fifth or sixteenth, but of the nineteenth century A.D.). The
  commentary is of little or no value, either in a philosophical or
  philological point of view. The writer is unable to explain
  particular passages in any precise manner, and he is equally
  incapable of grasping the whole. He does not take words in their
  simple meaning or sentences in their natural connexion. He is
  thinking, not of the context in Plato, but of the contemporary
  Pythagorean philosophers and their wordy strife. He finds nothing
  in the text which he does not bring to it. He is full of
  Porphyry, Iamblichus and Plotinus, of misapplied logic, of
  misunderstood grammar, and of the Orphic theology.

  Although such a work can contribute little or nothing to the
  understanding of Plato, it throws an interesting light on the
  Alexandrian times; it realizes how a philosophy made up of words
  only may create a deep and widespread enthusiasm, how the forms
  of logic and rhetoric may usurp the place of reason and truth,
  how all philosophies grow faded and discoloured, and are patched
  and made up again like worn-out garments, and retain only a
  second-hand existence. He who would study this degeneracy of
  philosophy and of the Greek mind in the original cannot do better
  than devote a few of his days and nights to the commentary of
  Proclus on the Timaeus.

  A very different account must be given of the short work entitled
  ‘Timaeus Locrus,’ which is a brief but clear analysis of the
  Timaeus of Plato, omitting the introduction or dialogue and
  making a few small additions. It does not allude to the original
  from which it is taken; it is quite free from mysticism and
  Neo-Platonism. In length it does not exceed a fifth part of the
  Timaeus. It is written in the Doric dialect, and contains several
  words which do not occur in classical Greek. No other indication
  of its date, except this uncertain one of language, appears in
  it. In several places the writer has simplified the language of
  Plato, in a few others he has embellished and exaggerated it. He
  generally preserves the thought of the original, but does not
  copy the words. On the whole this little tract faithfully
  reflects the meaning and spirit of the Timaeus.

  From the garden of the Timaeus, as from the other dialogues of
  Plato, we may still gather a few flowers and present them at
  parting to the reader. There is nothing in Plato grander and
  simpler than the conversation between Solon and the Egyptian
  priest, in which the youthfulness of Hellas is contrasted with
  the antiquity of Egypt. Here are to be found the famous words, ‘O
  Solon, Solon, you Hellenes are ever young, and there is not an
  old man among you’—which may be compared to the lively saying of
  Hegel, that ‘Greek history began with the youth Achilles and left
  off with the youth Alexander.’ The numerous arts of
  verisimilitude by which Plato insinuates into the mind of the
  reader the truth of his narrative have been already referred to.
  Here occur a sentence or two not wanting in Platonic irony
  (Greek—a word to the wise). ‘To know or tell the origin of the
  other divinities is beyond us, and we must accept the traditions
  of the men of old time who affirm themselves to be the offspring
  of the Gods—that is what they say—and they must surely have known
  their own ancestors. How can we doubt the word of the children of
  the Gods? Although they give no probable or certain proofs,
  still, as they declare that they are speaking of what took place
  in their own family, we must conform to custom and believe them.’
  ‘Our creators well knew that women and other animals would some
  day be framed out of men, and they further knew that many animals
  would require the use of nails for many purposes; wherefore they
  fashioned in men at their first creation the rudiments of nails.’
  Or once more, let us reflect on two serious passages in which the
  order of the world is supposed to find a place in the human soul
  and to infuse harmony into it. ‘The soul, when touching anything
  that has essence, whether dispersed in parts or undivided, is
  stirred through all her powers to declare the sameness or
  difference of that thing and some other; and to what individuals
  are related, and by what affected, and in what way and how and
  when, both in the world of generation and in the world of
  immutable being. And when reason, which works with equal truth,
  whether she be in the circle of the diverse or of the same,—in
  voiceless silence holding her onward course in the sphere of the
  self-moved,—when reason, I say, is hovering around the sensible
  world, and when the circle of the diverse also moving truly
  imparts the intimations of sense to the whole soul, then arise
  opinions and beliefs sure and certain. But when reason is
  concerned with the rational, and the circle of the same moving
  smoothly declares it, then intelligence and knowledge are
  necessarily perfected;’ where, proceeding in a similar path of
  contemplation, he supposes the inward and the outer world
  mutually to imply each other. ‘God invented and gave us sight to
  the end that we might behold the courses of intelligence in the
  heaven, and apply them to the courses of our own intelligence
  which are akin to them, the unperturbed to the perturbed; and
  that we, learning them and partaking of the natural truth of
  reason, might imitate the absolutely unerring courses of God and
  regulate our own vagaries.’ Or let us weigh carefully some other
  profound thoughts, such as the following. ‘He who neglects
  education walks lame to the end of his life, and returns
  imperfect and good for nothing to the world below.’ ‘The father
  and maker of all this universe is past finding out; and even if
  we found him, to tell of him to all men would be impossible.’
  ‘Let me tell you then why the Creator made this world of
  generation. He was good, and the good can never have jealousy of
  anything. And being free from jealousy, he desired that all
  things should be as like himself as they could be. This is in the
  truest sense the origin of creation and of the world, as we shall
  do well in believing on the testimony of wise men: God desired
  that all things should be good and nothing bad, so far as this
  was attainable.’ This is the leading thought in the Timaeus, just
  as the IDEA of Good is the leading thought of the Republic, the
  one expression describing the personal, the other the impersonal
  Good or God, differing in form rather than in substance, and both
  equally implying to the mind of Plato a divine reality. The
  slight touch, perhaps ironical, contained in the words, ‘as we
  shall do well in believing on the testimony of wise men,’ is very
  characteristic of Plato.

Timaeus

  PERSONS OF THE DIALOGUE: Socrates, Critias, Timaeus, Hermocrates.

  SOCRATES: One, two, three; but where, my dear Timaeus, is the
  fourth of those who were yesterday my guests and are to be my
  entertainers to-day?

  TIMAEUS: He has been taken ill, Socrates; for he would not
  willingly have been absent from this gathering.

  SOCRATES: Then, if he is not coming, you and the two others must
  supply his place.

  TIMAEUS: Certainly, and we will do all that we can; having been
  handsomely entertained by you yesterday, those of us who remain
  should be only too glad to return your hospitality.

  SOCRATES: Do you remember what were the points of which I
  required you to speak?

  TIMAEUS: We remember some of them, and you will be here to remind
  us of anything which we have forgotten: or rather, if we are not
  troubling you, will you briefly recapitulate the whole, and then
  the particulars will be more firmly fixed in our memories?

  SOCRATES: To be sure I will: the chief theme of my yesterday’s
  discourse was the State—how constituted and of what citizens
  composed it would seem likely to be most perfect.

  TIMAEUS: Yes, Socrates; and what you said of it was very much to
  our mind.

  SOCRATES: Did we not begin by separating the husbandmen and the
  artisans from the class of defenders of the State?

  TIMAEUS: Yes.

  SOCRATES: And when we had given to each one that single
  employment and particular art which was suited to his nature, we
  spoke of those who were intended to be our warriors, and said
  that they were to be guardians of the city against attacks from
  within as well as from without, and to have no other employment;
  they were to be merciful in judging their subjects, of whom they
  were by nature friends, but fierce to their enemies, when they
  came across them in battle.

  TIMAEUS: Exactly.

  SOCRATES: We said, if I am not mistaken, that the guardians
  should be gifted with a temperament in a high degree both
  passionate and philosophical; and that then they would be as they
  ought to be, gentle to their friends and fierce with their
  enemies.

  TIMAEUS: Certainly.

  SOCRATES: And what did we say of their education? Were they not
  to be trained in gymnastic, and music, and all other sorts of
  knowledge which were proper for them?

  TIMAEUS: Very true.

  SOCRATES: And being thus trained they were not to consider gold
  or silver or anything else to be their own private property; they
  were to be like hired troops, receiving pay for keeping guard
  from those who were protected by them—the pay was to be no more
  than would suffice for men of simple life; and they were to spend
  in common, and to live together in the continual practice of
  virtue, which was to be their sole pursuit.

  TIMAEUS: That was also said.

  SOCRATES: Neither did we forget the women; of whom we declared,
  that their natures should be assimilated and brought into harmony
  with those of the men, and that common pursuits should be
  assigned to them both in time of war and in their ordinary life.

  TIMAEUS: That, again, was as you say.

  SOCRATES: And what about the procreation of children? Or rather
  was not the proposal too singular to be forgotten? for all wives
  and children were to be in common, to the intent that no one
  should ever know his own child, but they were to imagine that
  they were all one family; those who were within a suitable limit
  of age were to be brothers and sisters, those who were of an
  elder generation parents and grandparents, and those of a
  younger, children and grandchildren.

  TIMAEUS: Yes, and the proposal is easy to remember, as you say.

  SOCRATES: And do you also remember how, with a view of securing
  as far as we could the best breed, we said that the chief
  magistrates, male and female, should contrive secretly, by the
  use of certain lots, so to arrange the nuptial meeting, that the
  bad of either sex and the good of either sex might pair with
  their like; and there was to be no quarrelling on this account,
  for they would imagine that the union was a mere accident, and
  was to be attributed to the lot?

  TIMAEUS: I remember.

  SOCRATES: And you remember how we said that the children of the
  good parents were to be educated, and the children of the bad
  secretly dispersed among the inferior citizens; and while they
  were all growing up the rulers were to be on the look-out, and to
  bring up from below in their turn those who were worthy, and
  those among themselves who were unworthy were to take the places
  of those who came up?

  TIMAEUS: True.

  SOCRATES: Then have I now given you all the heads of our
  yesterday’s discussion? Or is there anything more, my dear
  Timaeus, which has been omitted?

  TIMAEUS: Nothing, Socrates; it was just as you have said.

  SOCRATES: I should like, before proceeding further, to tell you
  how I feel about the State which we have described. I might
  compare myself to a person who, on beholding beautiful animals
  either created by the painter’s art, or, better still, alive but
  at rest, is seized with a desire of seeing them in motion or
  engaged in some struggle or conflict to which their forms appear
  suited; this is my feeling about the State which we have been
  describing. There are conflicts which all cities undergo, and I
  should like to hear some one tell of our own city carrying on a
  struggle against her neighbours, and how she went out to war in a
  becoming manner, and when at war showed by the greatness of her
  actions and the magnanimity of her words in dealing with other
  cities a result worthy of her training and education. Now I,
  Critias and Hermocrates, am conscious that I myself should never
  be able to celebrate the city and her citizens in a befitting
  manner, and I am not surprised at my own incapacity; to me the
  wonder is rather that the poets present as well as past are no
  better—not that I mean to depreciate them; but every one can see
  that they are a tribe of imitators, and will imitate best and
  most easily the life in which they have been brought up; while
  that which is beyond the range of a man’s education he finds hard
  to carry out in action, and still harder adequately to represent
  in language. I am aware that the Sophists have plenty of brave
  words and fair conceits, but I am afraid that being only
  wanderers from one city to another, and having never had
  habitations of their own, they may fail in their conception of
  philosophers and statesmen, and may not know what they do and say
  in time of war, when they are fighting or holding parley with
  their enemies. And thus people of your class are the only ones
  remaining who are fitted by nature and education to take part at
  once both in politics and philosophy. Here is Timaeus, of Locris
  in Italy, a city which has admirable laws, and who is himself in
  wealth and rank the equal of any of his fellow-citizens; he has
  held the most important and honourable offices in his own state,
  and, as I believe, has scaled the heights of all philosophy; and
  here is Critias, whom every Athenian knows to be no novice in the
  matters of which we are speaking; and as to Hermocrates, I am
  assured by many witnesses that his genius and education qualify
  him to take part in any speculation of the kind. And therefore
  yesterday when I saw that you wanted me to describe the formation
  of the State, I readily assented, being very well aware, that, if
  you only would, none were better qualified to carry the
  discussion further, and that when you had engaged our city in a
  suitable war, you of all men living could best exhibit her
  playing a fitting part. When I had completed my task, I in return
  imposed this other task upon you. You conferred together and
  agreed to entertain me to-day, as I had entertained you, with a
  feast of discourse. Here am I in festive array, and no man can be
  more ready for the promised banquet.

  HERMOCRATES: And we too, Socrates, as Timaeus says, will not be
  wanting in enthusiasm; and there is no excuse for not complying
  with your request. As soon as we arrived yesterday at the
  guest-chamber of Critias, with whom we are staying, or rather on
  our way thither, we talked the matter over, and he told us an
  ancient tradition, which I wish, Critias, that you would repeat
  to Socrates, so that he may help us to judge whether it will
  satisfy his requirements or not.

  CRITIAS: I will, if Timaeus, who is our other partner, approves.

  TIMAEUS: I quite approve.

  CRITIAS: Then listen, Socrates, to a tale which, though strange,
  is certainly true, having been attested by Solon, who was the
  wisest of the seven sages. He was a relative and a dear friend of
  my great-grandfather, Dropides, as he himself says in many
  passages of his poems; and he told the story to Critias, my
  grandfather, who remembered and repeated it to us. There were of
  old, he said, great and marvellous actions of the Athenian city,
  which have passed into oblivion through lapse of time and the
  destruction of mankind, and one in particular, greater than all
  the rest. This we will now rehearse. It will be a fitting
  monument of our gratitude to you, and a hymn of praise true and
  worthy of the goddess, on this her day of festival.

  SOCRATES: Very good. And what is this ancient famous action of
  the Athenians, which Critias declared, on the authority of Solon,
  to be not a mere legend, but an actual fact?

  CRITIAS: I will tell an old-world story which I heard from an
  aged man; for Critias, at the time of telling it, was, as he
  said, nearly ninety years of age, and I was about ten. Now the
  day was that day of the Apaturia which is called the Registration
  of Youth, at which, according to custom, our parents gave prizes
  for recitations, and the poems of several poets were recited by
  us boys, and many of us sang the poems of Solon, which at that
  time had not gone out of fashion. One of our tribe, either
  because he thought so or to please Critias, said that in his
  judgment Solon was not only the wisest of men, but also the
  noblest of poets. The old man, as I very well remember,
  brightened up at hearing this and said, smiling: Yes, Amynander,
  if Solon had only, like other poets, made poetry the business of
  his life, and had completed the tale which he brought with him
  from Egypt, and had not been compelled, by reason of the factions
  and troubles which he found stirring in his own country when he
  came home, to attend to other matters, in my opinion he would
  have been as famous as Homer or Hesiod, or any poet.

  And what was the tale about, Critias? said Amynander.

  About the greatest action which the Athenians ever did, and which
  ought to have been the most famous, but, through the lapse of
  time and the destruction of the actors, it has not come down to
  us.

  Tell us, said the other, the whole story, and how and from whom
  Solon heard this veritable tradition.

  He replied:—In the Egyptian Delta, at the head of which the river
  Nile divides, there is a certain district which is called the
  district of Sais, and the great city of the district is also
  called Sais, and is the city from which King Amasis came. The
  citizens have a deity for their foundress; she is called in the
  Egyptian tongue Neith, and is asserted by them to be the same
  whom the Hellenes call Athene; they are great lovers of the
  Athenians, and say that they are in some way related to them. To
  this city came Solon, and was received there with great honour;
  he asked the priests who were most skilful in such matters, about
  antiquity, and made the discovery that neither he nor any other
  Hellene knew anything worth mentioning about the times of old. On
  one occasion, wishing to draw them on to speak of antiquity, he
  began to tell about the most ancient things in our part of the
  world—about Phoroneus, who is called ‘the first man,’ and about
  Niobe; and after the Deluge, of the survival of Deucalion and
  Pyrrha; and he traced the genealogy of their descendants, and
  reckoning up the dates, tried to compute how many years ago the
  events of which he was speaking happened. Thereupon one of the
  priests, who was of a very great age, said: O Solon, Solon, you
  Hellenes are never anything but children, and there is not an old
  man among you. Solon in return asked him what he meant. I mean to
  say, he replied, that in mind you are all young; there is no old
  opinion handed down among you by ancient tradition, nor any
  science which is hoary with age. And I will tell you why. There
  have been, and will be again, many destructions of mankind
  arising out of many causes; the greatest have been brought about
  by the agencies of fire and water, and other lesser ones by
  innumerable other causes. There is a story, which even you have
  preserved, that once upon a time Paethon, the son of Helios,
  having yoked the steeds in his father’s chariot, because he was
  not able to drive them in the path of his father, burnt up all
  that was upon the earth, and was himself destroyed by a
  thunderbolt. Now this has the form of a myth, but really
  signifies a declination of the bodies moving in the heavens
  around the earth, and a great conflagration of things upon the
  earth, which recurs after long intervals; at such times those who
  live upon the mountains and in dry and lofty places are more
  liable to destruction than those who dwell by rivers or on the
  seashore. And from this calamity the Nile, who is our
  never-failing saviour, delivers and preserves us. When, on the
  other hand, the gods purge the earth with a deluge of water, the
  survivors in your country are herdsmen and shepherds who dwell on
  the mountains, but those who, like you, live in cities are
  carried by the rivers into the sea. Whereas in this land, neither
  then nor at any other time, does the water come down from above
  on the fields, having always a tendency to come up from below;
  for which reason the traditions preserved here are the most
  ancient. The fact is, that wherever the extremity of winter frost
  or of summer sun does not prevent, mankind exist, sometimes in
  greater, sometimes in lesser numbers. And whatever happened
  either in your country or in ours, or in any other region of
  which we are informed—if there were any actions noble or great or
  in any other way remarkable, they have all been written down by
  us of old, and are preserved in our temples. Whereas just when
  you and other nations are beginning to be provided with letters
  and the other requisites of civilized life, after the usual
  interval, the stream from heaven, like a pestilence, comes
  pouring down, and leaves only those of you who are destitute of
  letters and education; and so you have to begin all over again
  like children, and know nothing of what happened in ancient
  times, either among us or among yourselves. As for those
  genealogies of yours which you just now recounted to us, Solon,
  they are no better than the tales of children. In the first place
  you remember a single deluge only, but there were many previous
  ones; in the next place, you do not know that there formerly
  dwelt in your land the fairest and noblest race of men which ever
  lived, and that you and your whole city are descended from a
  small seed or remnant of them which survived. And this was
  unknown to you, because, for many generations, the survivors of
  that destruction died, leaving no written word. For there was a
  time, Solon, before the great deluge of all, when the city which
  now is Athens was first in war and in every way the best governed
  of all cities, is said to have performed the noblest deeds and to
  have had the fairest constitution of any of which tradition
  tells, under the face of heaven. Solon marvelled at his words,
  and earnestly requested the priests to inform him exactly and in
  order about these former citizens. You are welcome to hear about
  them, Solon, said the priest, both for your own sake and for that
  of your city, and above all, for the sake of the goddess who is
  the common patron and parent and educator of both our cities. She
  founded your city a thousand years before ours (Observe that
  Plato gives the same date (9000 years ago) for the foundation of
  Athens and for the repulse of the invasion from Atlantis
  (Crit.).), receiving from the Earth and Hephaestus the seed of
  your race, and afterwards she founded ours, of which the
  constitution is recorded in our sacred registers to be 8000 years
  old. As touching your citizens of 9000 years ago, I will briefly
  inform you of their laws and of their most famous action; the
  exact particulars of the whole we will hereafter go through at
  our leisure in the sacred registers themselves. If you compare
  these very laws with ours you will find that many of ours are the
  counterpart of yours as they were in the olden time. In the first
  place, there is the caste of priests, which is separated from all
  the others; next, there are the artificers, who ply their several
  crafts by themselves and do not intermix; and also there is the
  class of shepherds and of hunters, as well as that of husbandmen;
  and you will observe, too, that the warriors in Egypt are
  distinct from all the other classes, and are commanded by the law
  to devote themselves solely to military pursuits; moreover, the
  weapons which they carry are shields and spears, a style of
  equipment which the goddess taught of Asiatics first to us, as in
  your part of the world first to you. Then as to wisdom, do you
  observe how our law from the very first made a study of the whole
  order of things, extending even to prophecy and medicine which
  gives health, out of these divine elements deriving what was
  needful for human life, and adding every sort of knowledge which
  was akin to them. All this order and arrangement the goddess
  first imparted to you when establishing your city; and she chose
  the spot of earth in which you were born, because she saw that
  the happy temperament of the seasons in that land would produce
  the wisest of men. Wherefore the goddess, who was a lover both of
  war and of wisdom, selected and first of all settled that spot
  which was the most likely to produce men likest herself. And
  there you dwelt, having such laws as these and still better ones,
  and excelled all mankind in all virtue, as became the children
  and disciples of the gods.

  Many great and wonderful deeds are recorded of your state in our
  histories. But one of them exceeds all the rest in greatness and
  valour. For these histories tell of a mighty power which
  unprovoked made an expedition against the whole of Europe and
  Asia, and to which your city put an end. This power came forth
  out of the Atlantic Ocean, for in those days the Atlantic was
  navigable; and there was an island situated in front of the
  straits which are by you called the Pillars of Heracles; the
  island was larger than Libya and Asia put together, and was the
  way to other islands, and from these you might pass to the whole
  of the opposite continent which surrounded the true ocean; for
  this sea which is within the Straits of Heracles is only a
  harbour, having a narrow entrance, but that other is a real sea,
  and the surrounding land may be most truly called a boundless
  continent. Now in this island of Atlantis there was a great and
  wonderful empire which had rule over the whole island and several
  others, and over parts of the continent, and, furthermore, the
  men of Atlantis had subjected the parts of Libya within the
  columns of Heracles as far as Egypt, and of Europe as far as
  Tyrrhenia. This vast power, gathered into one, endeavoured to
  subdue at a blow our country and yours and the whole of the
  region within the straits; and then, Solon, your country shone
  forth, in the excellence of her virtue and strength, among all
  mankind. She was pre-eminent in courage and military skill, and
  was the leader of the Hellenes. And when the rest fell off from
  her, being compelled to stand alone, after having undergone the
  very extremity of danger, she defeated and triumphed over the
  invaders, and preserved from slavery those who were not yet
  subjugated, and generously liberated all the rest of us who dwell
  within the pillars. But afterwards there occurred violent
  earthquakes and floods; and in a single day and night of
  misfortune all your warlike men in a body sank into the earth,
  and the island of Atlantis in like manner disappeared in the
  depths of the sea. For which reason the sea in those parts is
  impassable and impenetrable, because there is a shoal of mud in
  the way; and this was caused by the subsidence of the island.

  I have told you briefly, Socrates, what the aged Critias heard
  from Solon and related to us. And when you were speaking
  yesterday about your city and citizens, the tale which I have
  just been repeating to you came into my mind, and I remarked with
  astonishment how, by some mysterious coincidence, you agreed in
  almost every particular with the narrative of Solon; but I did
  not like to speak at the moment. For a long time had elapsed, and
  I had forgotten too much; I thought that I must first of all run
  over the narrative in my own mind, and then I would speak. And so
  I readily assented to your request yesterday, considering that in
  all such cases the chief difficulty is to find a tale suitable to
  our purpose, and that with such a tale we should be fairly well
  provided.

  And therefore, as Hermocrates has told you, on my way home
  yesterday I at once communicated the tale to my companions as I
  remembered it; and after I left them, during the night by
  thinking I recovered nearly the whole of it. Truly, as is often
  said, the lessons of our childhood make a wonderful impression on
  our memories; for I am not sure that I could remember all the
  discourse of yesterday, but I should be much surprised if I
  forgot any of these things which I have heard very long ago. I
  listened at the time with childlike interest to the old man’s
  narrative; he was very ready to teach me, and I asked him again
  and again to repeat his words, so that like an indelible picture
  they were branded into my mind. As soon as the day broke, I
  rehearsed them as he spoke them to my companions, that they, as
  well as myself, might have something to say. And now, Socrates,
  to make an end of my preface, I am ready to tell you the whole
  tale. I will give you not only the general heads, but the
  particulars, as they were told to me. The city and citizens,
  which you yesterday described to us in fiction, we will now
  transfer to the world of reality. It shall be the ancient city of
  Athens, and we will suppose that the citizens whom you imagined,
  were our veritable ancestors, of whom the priest spoke; they will
  perfectly harmonize, and there will be no inconsistency in saying
  that the citizens of your republic are these ancient Athenians.
  Let us divide the subject among us, and all endeavour according
  to our ability gracefully to execute the task which you have
  imposed upon us. Consider then, Socrates, if this narrative is
  suited to the purpose, or whether we should seek for some other
  instead.

  SOCRATES: And what other, Critias, can we find that will be
  better than this, which is natural and suitable to the festival
  of the goddess, and has the very great advantage of being a fact
  and not a fiction? How or where shall we find another if we
  abandon this? We cannot, and therefore you must tell the tale,
  and good luck to you; and I in return for my yesterday’s
  discourse will now rest and be a listener.

  CRITIAS: Let me proceed to explain to you, Socrates, the order in
  which we have arranged our entertainment. Our intention is, that
  Timaeus, who is the most of an astronomer amongst us, and has
  made the nature of the universe his special study, should speak
  first, beginning with the generation of the world and going down
  to the creation of man; next, I am to receive the men whom he has
  created, and of whom some will have profited by the excellent
  education which you have given them; and then, in accordance with
  the tale of Solon, and equally with his law, we will bring them
  into court and make them citizens, as if they were those very
  Athenians whom the sacred Egyptian record has recovered from
  oblivion, and thenceforward we will speak of them as Athenians
  and fellow-citizens.

  SOCRATES: I see that I shall receive in my turn a perfect and
  splendid feast of reason. And now, Timaeus, you, I suppose,
  should speak next, after duly calling upon the Gods.

  TIMAEUS: All men, Socrates, who have any degree of right feeling,
  at the beginning of every enterprise, whether small or great,
  always call upon God. And we, too, who are going to discourse of
  the nature of the universe, how created or how existing without
  creation, if we be not altogether out of our wits, must invoke
  the aid of Gods and Goddesses and pray that our words may be
  acceptable to them and consistent with themselves. Let this,
  then, be our invocation of the Gods, to which I add an
  exhortation of myself to speak in such manner as will be most
  intelligible to you, and will most accord with my own intent.

  First then, in my judgment, we must make a distinction and ask,
  What is that which always is and has no becoming; and what is
  that which is always becoming and never is? That which is
  apprehended by intelligence and reason is always in the same
  state; but that which is conceived by opinion with the help of
  sensation and without reason, is always in a process of becoming
  and perishing and never really is. Now everything that becomes or
  is created must of necessity be created by some cause, for
  without a cause nothing can be created. The work of the creator,
  whenever he looks to the unchangeable and fashions the form and
  nature of his work after an unchangeable pattern, must
  necessarily be made fair and perfect; but when he looks to the
  created only, and uses a created pattern, it is not fair or
  perfect. Was the heaven then or the world, whether called by this
  or by any other more appropriate name—assuming the name, I am
  asking a question which has to be asked at the beginning of an
  enquiry about anything—was the world, I say, always in existence
  and without beginning? or created, and had it a beginning?
  Created, I reply, being visible and tangible and having a body,
  and therefore sensible; and all sensible things are apprehended
  by opinion and sense and are in a process of creation and
  created. Now that which is created must, as we affirm, of
  necessity be created by a cause. But the father and maker of all
  this universe is past finding out; and even if we found him, to
  tell of him to all men would be impossible. And there is still a
  question to be asked about him: Which of the patterns had the
  artificer in view when he made the world—the pattern of the
  unchangeable, or of that which is created? If the world be indeed
  fair and the artificer good, it is manifest that he must have
  looked to that which is eternal; but if what cannot be said
  without blasphemy is true, then to the created pattern. Every one
  will see that he must have looked to the eternal; for the world
  is the fairest of creations and he is the best of causes. And
  having been created in this way, the world has been framed in the
  likeness of that which is apprehended by reason and mind and is
  unchangeable, and must therefore of necessity, if this is
  admitted, be a copy of something. Now it is all-important that
  the beginning of everything should be according to nature. And in
  speaking of the copy and the original we may assume that words
  are akin to the matter which they describe; when they relate to
  the lasting and permanent and intelligible, they ought to be
  lasting and unalterable, and, as far as their nature allows,
  irrefutable and immovable—nothing less. But when they express
  only the copy or likeness and not the eternal things themselves,
  they need only be likely and analogous to the real words. As
  being is to becoming, so is truth to belief. If then, Socrates,
  amid the many opinions about the gods and the generation of the
  universe, we are not able to give notions which are altogether
  and in every respect exact and consistent with one another, do
  not be surprised. Enough, if we adduce probabilities as likely as
  any others; for we must remember that I who am the speaker, and
  you who are the judges, are only mortal men, and we ought to
  accept the tale which is probable and enquire no further.

  SOCRATES: Excellent, Timaeus; and we will do precisely as you bid
  us. The prelude is charming, and is already accepted by us—may we
  beg of you to proceed to the strain?

  TIMAEUS: Let me tell you then why the creator made this world of
  generation. He was good, and the good can never have any jealousy
  of anything. And being free from jealousy, he desired that all
  things should be as like himself as they could be. This is in the
  truest sense the origin of creation and of the world, as we shall
  do well in believing on the testimony of wise men: God desired
  that all things should be good and nothing bad, so far as this
  was attainable. Wherefore also finding the whole visible sphere
  not at rest, but moving in an irregular and disorderly fashion,
  out of disorder he brought order, considering that this was in
  every way better than the other. Now the deeds of the best could
  never be or have been other than the fairest; and the creator,
  reflecting on the things which are by nature visible, found that
  no unintelligent creature taken as a whole was fairer than the
  intelligent taken as a whole; and that intelligence could not be
  present in anything which was devoid of soul. For which reason,
  when he was framing the universe, he put intelligence in soul,
  and soul in body, that he might be the creator of a work which
  was by nature fairest and best. Wherefore, using the language of
  probability, we may say that the world became a living creature
  truly endowed with soul and intelligence by the providence of
  God.

  This being supposed, let us proceed to the next stage: In the
  likeness of what animal did the Creator make the world? It would
  be an unworthy thing to liken it to any nature which exists as a
  part only; for nothing can be beautiful which is like any
  imperfect thing; but let us suppose the world to be the very
  image of that whole of which all other animals both individually
  and in their tribes are portions. For the original of the
  universe contains in itself all intelligible beings, just as this
  world comprehends us and all other visible creatures. For the
  Deity, intending to make this world like the fairest and most
  perfect of intelligible beings, framed one visible animal
  comprehending within itself all other animals of a kindred
  nature. Are we right in saying that there is one world, or that
  they are many and infinite? There must be one only, if the
  created copy is to accord with the original. For that which
  includes all other intelligible creatures cannot have a second or
  companion; in that case there would be need of another living
  being which would include both, and of which they would be parts,
  and the likeness would be more truly said to resemble not them,
  but that other which included them. In order then that the world
  might be solitary, like the perfect animal, the creator made not
  two worlds or an infinite number of them; but there is and ever
  will be one only-begotten and created heaven.

  Now that which is created is of necessity corporeal, and also
  visible and tangible. And nothing is visible where there is no
  fire, or tangible which has no solidity, and nothing is solid
  without earth. Wherefore also God in the beginning of creation
  made the body of the universe to consist of fire and earth. But
  two things cannot be rightly put together without a third; there
  must be some bond of union between them. And the fairest bond is
  that which makes the most complete fusion of itself and the
  things which it combines; and proportion is best adapted to
  effect such a union. For whenever in any three numbers, whether
  cube or square, there is a mean, which is to the last term what
  the first term is to it; and again, when the mean is to the first
  term as the last term is to the mean—then the mean becoming first
  and last, and the first and last both becoming means, they will
  all of them of necessity come to be the same, and having become
  the same with one another will be all one. If the universal frame
  had been created a surface only and having no depth, a single
  mean would have sufficed to bind together itself and the other
  terms; but now, as the world must be solid, and solid bodies are
  always compacted not by one mean but by two, God placed water and
  air in the mean between fire and earth, and made them to have the
  same proportion so far as was possible (as fire is to air so is
  air to water, and as air is to water so is water to earth); and
  thus he bound and put together a visible and tangible heaven. And
  for these reasons, and out of such elements which are in number
  four, the body of the world was created, and it was harmonized by
  proportion, and therefore has the spirit of friendship; and
  having been reconciled to itself, it was indissoluble by the hand
  of any other than the framer.

  Now the creation took up the whole of each of the four elements;
  for the Creator compounded the world out of all the fire and all
  the water and all the air and all the earth, leaving no part of
  any of them nor any power of them outside. His intention was, in
  the first place, that the animal should be as far as possible a
  perfect whole and of perfect parts: secondly, that it should be
  one, leaving no remnants out of which another such world might be
  created: and also that it should be free from old age and
  unaffected by disease. Considering that if heat and cold and
  other powerful forces which unite bodies surround and attack them
  from without when they are unprepared, they decompose them, and
  by bringing diseases and old age upon them, make them waste
  away—for this cause and on these grounds he made the world one
  whole, having every part entire, and being therefore perfect and
  not liable to old age and disease. And he gave to the world the
  figure which was suitable and also natural. Now to the animal
  which was to comprehend all animals, that figure was suitable
  which comprehends within itself all other figures. Wherefore he
  made the world in the form of a globe, round as from a lathe,
  having its extremes in every direction equidistant from the
  centre, the most perfect and the most like itself of all figures;
  for he considered that the like is infinitely fairer than the
  unlike. This he finished off, making the surface smooth all round
  for many reasons; in the first place, because the living being
  had no need of eyes when there was nothing remaining outside him
  to be seen; nor of ears when there was nothing to be heard; and
  there was no surrounding atmosphere to be breathed; nor would
  there have been any use of organs by the help of which he might
  receive his food or get rid of what he had already digested,
  since there was nothing which went from him or came into him: for
  there was nothing beside him. Of design he was created thus, his
  own waste providing his own food, and all that he did or suffered
  taking place in and by himself. For the Creator conceived that a
  being which was self-sufficient would be far more excellent than
  one which lacked anything; and, as he had no need to take
  anything or defend himself against any one, the Creator did not
  think it necessary to bestow upon him hands: nor had he any need
  of feet, nor of the whole apparatus of walking; but the movement
  suited to his spherical form was assigned to him, being of all
  the seven that which is most appropriate to mind and
  intelligence; and he was made to move in the same manner and on
  the same spot, within his own limits revolving in a circle. All
  the other six motions were taken away from him, and he was made
  not to partake of their deviations. And as this circular movement
  required no feet, the universe was created without legs and
  without feet.

  Such was the whole plan of the eternal God about the god that was
  to be, to whom for this reason he gave a body, smooth and even,
  having a surface in every direction equidistant from the centre,
  a body entire and perfect, and formed out of perfect bodies. And
  in the centre he put the soul, which he diffused throughout the
  body, making it also to be the exterior environment of it; and he
  made the universe a circle moving in a circle, one and solitary,
  yet by reason of its excellence able to converse with itself, and
  needing no other friendship or acquaintance. Having these
  purposes in view he created the world a blessed god.

  Now God did not make the soul after the body, although we are
  speaking of them in this order; for having brought them together
  he would never have allowed that the elder should be ruled by the
  younger; but this is a random manner of speaking which we have,
  because somehow we ourselves too are very much under the dominion
  of chance. Whereas he made the soul in origin and excellence
  prior to and older than the body, to be the ruler and mistress,
  of whom the body was to be the subject. And he made her out of
  the following elements and on this wise: Out of the indivisible
  and unchangeable, and also out of that which is divisible and has
  to do with material bodies, he compounded a third and
  intermediate kind of essence, partaking of the nature of the same
  and of the other, and this compound he placed accordingly in a
  mean between the indivisible, and the divisible and material. He
  took the three elements of the same, the other, and the essence,
  and mingled them into one form, compressing by force the
  reluctant and unsociable nature of the other into the same. When
  he had mingled them with the essence and out of three made one,
  he again divided this whole into as many portions as was fitting,
  each portion being a compound of the same, the other, and the
  essence. And he proceeded to divide after this manner:—First of
  all, he took away one part of the whole (1), and then he
  separated a second part which was double the first (2), and then
  he took away a third part which was half as much again as the
  second and three times as much as the first (3), and then he took
  a fourth part which was twice as much as the second (4), and a
  fifth part which was three times the third (9), and a sixth part
  which was eight times the first (8), and a seventh part which was
  twenty-seven times the first (27). After this he filled up the
  double intervals (i.e. between 1, 2, 4, 8) and the triple (i.e.
  between 1, 3, 9, 27) cutting off yet other portions from the
  mixture and placing them in the intervals, so that in each
  interval there were two kinds of means, the one exceeding and
  exceeded by equal parts of its extremes (as for example 1, 4/3,
  2, in which the mean 4/3 is one-third of 1 more than 1, and
  one-third of 2 less than 2), the other being that kind of mean
  which exceeds and is exceeded by an equal number (e.g.
  • over 1, 4/3, 3/2, - over 2, 8/3, 3, - over 4, 16/3, 6, - over 8: and

  • over 1, 3/2, 2, - over 3, 9/2, 6, - over 9, 27/2, 18, - over 27.

    Where there were intervals of 3/2 and of 4/3 and of 9/8, made by the connecting terms in the former intervals, he filled up all the intervals of 4/3 with the interval of 9/8, leaving a fraction over; and the interval which this fraction expressed was in the ratio of 256 to 243 (e.g.

243:256::81/64:4/3::243/128:2::81/32:8/3::243/64:4::81/16:16/3::242/32:8.

  And thus the whole mixture out of which he cut these portions was
  all exhausted by him. This entire compound he divided lengthways
  into two parts, which he joined to one another at the centre like
  the letter X, and bent them into a circular form, connecting them
  with themselves and each other at the point opposite to their
  original meeting-point; and, comprehending them in a uniform
  revolution upon the same axis, he made the one the outer and the
  other the inner circle. Now the motion of the outer circle he
  called the motion of the same, and the motion of the inner circle
  the motion of the other or diverse. The motion of the same he
  carried round by the side (i.e. of the rectangular figure
  supposed to be inscribed in the circle of the Same) to the right,
  and the motion of the diverse diagonally (i.e. across the
  rectangular figure from corner to corner) to the left. And he
  gave dominion to the motion of the same and like, for that he
  left single and undivided; but the inner motion he divided in six
  places and made seven unequal circles having their intervals in
  ratios of two and three, three of each, and bade the orbits
  proceed in a direction opposite to one another; and three (Sun,
  Mercury, Venus) he made to move with equal swiftness, and the
  remaining four (Moon, Saturn, Mars, Jupiter) to move with unequal
  swiftness to the three and to one another, but in due proportion.

  Now when the Creator had framed the soul according to his will,
  he formed within her the corporeal universe, and brought the two
  together, and united them centre to centre. The soul, interfused
  everywhere from the centre to the circumference of heaven, of
  which also she is the external envelopment, herself turning in
  herself, began a divine beginning of never-ceasing and rational
  life enduring throughout all time. The body of heaven is visible,
  but the soul is invisible, and partakes of reason and harmony,
  and being made by the best of intellectual and everlasting
  natures, is the best of things created. And because she is
  composed of the same and of the other and of the essence, these
  three, and is divided and united in due proportion, and in her
  revolutions returns upon herself, the soul, when touching
  anything which has essence, whether dispersed in parts or
  undivided, is stirred through all her powers, to declare the
  sameness or difference of that thing and some other; and to what
  individuals are related, and by what affected, and in what way
  and how and when, both in the world of generation and in the
  world of immutable being. And when reason, which works with equal
  truth, whether she be in the circle of the diverse or of the
  same—in voiceless silence holding her onward course in the sphere
  of the self-moved—when reason, I say, is hovering around the
  sensible world and when the circle of the diverse also moving
  truly imparts the intimations of sense to the whole soul, then
  arise opinions and beliefs sure and certain. But when reason is
  concerned with the rational, and the circle of the same moving
  smoothly declares it, then intelligence and knowledge are
  necessarily perfected. And if any one affirms that in which these
  two are found to be other than the soul, he will say the very
  opposite of the truth.

  When the father and creator saw the creature which he had made
  moving and living, the created image of the eternal gods, he
  rejoiced, and in his joy determined to make the copy still more
  like the original; and as this was eternal, he sought to make the
  universe eternal, so far as might be. Now the nature of the ideal
  being was everlasting, but to bestow this attribute in its
  fulness upon a creature was impossible. Wherefore he resolved to
  have a moving image of eternity, and when he set in order the
  heaven, he made this image eternal but moving according to
  number, while eternity itself rests in unity; and this image we
  call time. For there were no days and nights and months and years
  before the heaven was created, but when he constructed the heaven
  he created them also. They are all parts of time, and the past
  and future are created species of time, which we unconsciously
  but wrongly transfer to the eternal essence; for we say that he
  ‘was,’ he ‘is,’ he ‘will be,’ but the truth is that ‘is’ alone is
  properly attributed to him, and that ‘was’ and ‘will be’ are only
  to be spoken of becoming in time, for they are motions, but that
  which is immovably the same cannot become older or younger by
  time, nor ever did or has become, or hereafter will be, older or
  younger, nor is subject at all to any of those states which
  affect moving and sensible things and of which generation is the
  cause. These are the forms of time, which imitates eternity and
  revolves according to a law of number. Moreover, when we say that
  what has become IS become and what becomes IS becoming, and that
  what will become IS about to become and that the non-existent IS
  non-existent—all these are inaccurate modes of expression
  (compare Parmen.). But perhaps this whole subject will be more
  suitably discussed on some other occasion.

  Time, then, and the heaven came into being at the same instant in
  order that, having been created together, if ever there was to be
  a dissolution of them, they might be dissolved together. It was
  framed after the pattern of the eternal nature, that it might
  resemble this as far as was possible; for the pattern exists from
  eternity, and the created heaven has been, and is, and will be,
  in all time. Such was the mind and thought of God in the creation
  of time. The sun and moon and five other stars, which are called
  the planets, were created by him in order to distinguish and
  preserve the numbers of time; and when he had made their several
  bodies, he placed them in the orbits in which the circle of the
  other was revolving,—in seven orbits seven stars. First, there
  was the moon in the orbit nearest the earth, and next the sun, in
  the second orbit above the earth; then came the morning star and
  the star sacred to Hermes, moving in orbits which have an equal
  swiftness with the sun, but in an opposite direction; and this is
  the reason why the sun and Hermes and Lucifer overtake and are
  overtaken by each other. To enumerate the places which he
  assigned to the other stars, and to give all the reasons why he
  assigned them, although a secondary matter, would give more
  trouble than the primary. These things at some future time, when
  we are at leisure, may have the consideration which they deserve,
  but not at present.

  Now, when all the stars which were necessary to the creation of
  time had attained a motion suitable to them, and had become
  living creatures having bodies fastened by vital chains, and
  learnt their appointed task, moving in the motion of the diverse,
  which is diagonal, and passes through and is governed by the
  motion of the same, they revolved, some in a larger and some in a
  lesser orbit—those which had the lesser orbit revolving faster,
  and those which had the larger more slowly. Now by reason of the
  motion of the same, those which revolved fastest appeared to be
  overtaken by those which moved slower although they really
  overtook them; for the motion of the same made them all turn in a
  spiral, and, because some went one way and some another, that
  which receded most slowly from the sphere of the same, which was
  the swiftest, appeared to follow it most nearly. That there might
  be some visible measure of their relative swiftness and slowness
  as they proceeded in their eight courses, God lighted a fire,
  which we now call the sun, in the second from the earth of these
  orbits, that it might give light to the whole of heaven, and that
  the animals, as many as nature intended, might participate in
  number, learning arithmetic from the revolution of the same and
  the like. Thus then, and for this reason the night and the day
  were created, being the period of the one most intelligent
  revolution. And the month is accomplished when the moon has
  completed her orbit and overtaken the sun, and the year when the
  sun has completed his own orbit. Mankind, with hardly an
  exception, have not remarked the periods of the other stars, and
  they have no name for them, and do not measure them against one
  another by the help of number, and hence they can scarcely be
  said to know that their wanderings, being infinite in number and
  admirable for their variety, make up time. And yet there is no
  difficulty in seeing that the perfect number of time fulfils the
  perfect year when all the eight revolutions, having their
  relative degrees of swiftness, are accomplished together and
  attain their completion at the same time, measured by the
  rotation of the same and equally moving. After this manner, and
  for these reasons, came into being such of the stars as in their
  heavenly progress received reversals of motion, to the end that
  the created heaven might imitate the eternal nature, and be as
  like as possible to the perfect and intelligible animal.

  Thus far and until the birth of time the created universe was
  made in the likeness of the original, but inasmuch as all animals
  were not yet comprehended therein, it was still unlike. What
  remained, the creator then proceeded to fashion after the nature
  of the pattern. Now as in the ideal animal the mind perceives
  ideas or species of a certain nature and number, he thought that
  this created animal ought to have species of a like nature and
  number. There are four such; one of them is the heavenly race of
  the gods; another, the race of birds whose way is in the air; the
  third, the watery species; and the fourth, the pedestrian and
  land creatures. Of the heavenly and divine, he created the
  greater part out of fire, that they might be the brightest of all
  things and fairest to behold, and he fashioned them after the
  likeness of the universe in the figure of a circle, and made them
  follow the intelligent motion of the supreme, distributing them
  over the whole circumference of heaven, which was to be a true
  cosmos or glorious world spangled with them all over. And he gave
  to each of them two movements: the first, a movement on the same
  spot after the same manner, whereby they ever continue to think
  consistently the same thoughts about the same things; the second,
  a forward movement, in which they are controlled by the
  revolution of the same and the like; but by the other five
  motions they were unaffected, in order that each of them might
  attain the highest perfection. And for this reason the fixed
  stars were created, to be divine and eternal animals,
  ever-abiding and revolving after the same manner and on the same
  spot; and the other stars which reverse their motion and are
  subject to deviations of this kind, were created in the manner
  already described. The earth, which is our nurse, clinging (or
  ‘circling’) around the pole which is extended through the
  universe, he framed to be the guardian and artificer of night and
  day, first and eldest of gods that are in the interior of heaven.
  Vain would be the attempt to tell all the figures of them
  circling as in dance, and their juxtapositions, and the return of
  them in their revolutions upon themselves, and their
  approximations, and to say which of these deities in their
  conjunctions meet, and which of them are in opposition, and in
  what order they get behind and before one another, and when they
  are severally eclipsed to our sight and again reappear, sending
  terrors and intimations of the future to those who cannot
  calculate their movements—to attempt to tell of all this without
  a visible representation of the heavenly system would be labour
  in vain. Enough on this head; and now let what we have said about
  the nature of the created and visible gods have an end.

  To know or tell the origin of the other divinities is beyond us,
  and we must accept the traditions of the men of old time who
  affirm themselves to be the offspring of the gods—that is what
  they say—and they must surely have known their own ancestors. How
  can we doubt the word of the children of the gods? Although they
  give no probable or certain proofs, still, as they declare that
  they are speaking of what took place in their own family, we must
  conform to custom and believe them. In this manner, then,
  according to them, the genealogy of these gods is to be received
  and set forth.

  Oceanus and Tethys were the children of Earth and Heaven, and
  from these sprang Phorcys and Cronos and Rhea, and all that
  generation; and from Cronos and Rhea sprang Zeus and Here, and
  all those who are said to be their brethren, and others who were
  the children of these.

  Now, when all of them, both those who visibly appear in their
  revolutions as well as those other gods who are of a more
  retiring nature, had come into being, the creator of the universe
  addressed them in these words: ‘Gods, children of gods, who are
  my works, and of whom I am the artificer and father, my creations
  are indissoluble, if so I will. All that is bound may be undone,
  but only an evil being would wish to undo that which is
  harmonious and happy. Wherefore, since ye are but creatures, ye
  are not altogether immortal and indissoluble, but ye shall
  certainly not be dissolved, nor be liable to the fate of death,
  having in my will a greater and mightier bond than those with
  which ye were bound at the time of your birth. And now listen to
  my instructions:—Three tribes of mortal beings remain to be
  created—without them the universe will be incomplete, for it will
  not contain every kind of animal which it ought to contain, if it
  is to be perfect. On the other hand, if they were created by me
  and received life at my hands, they would be on an equality with
  the gods. In order then that they may be mortal, and that this
  universe may be truly universal, do ye, according to your
  natures, betake yourselves to the formation of animals, imitating
  the power which was shown by me in creating you. The part of them
  worthy of the name immortal, which is called divine and is the
  guiding principle of those who are willing to follow justice and
  you—of that divine part I will myself sow the seed, and having
  made a beginning, I will hand the work over to you. And do ye
  then interweave the mortal with the immortal, and make and beget
  living creatures, and give them food, and make them to grow, and
  receive them again in death.’

  Thus he spake, and once more into the cup in which he had
  previously mingled the soul of the universe he poured the remains
  of the elements, and mingled them in much the same manner; they
  were not, however, pure as before, but diluted to the second and
  third degree. And having made it he divided the whole mixture
  into souls equal in number to the stars, and assigned each soul
  to a star; and having there placed them as in a chariot, he
  showed them the nature of the universe, and declared to them the
  laws of destiny, according to which their first birth would be
  one and the same for all,—no one should suffer a disadvantage at
  his hands; they were to be sown in the instruments of time
  severally adapted to them, and to come forth the most religious
  of animals; and as human nature was of two kinds, the superior
  race would hereafter be called man. Now, when they should be
  implanted in bodies by necessity, and be always gaining or losing
  some part of their bodily substance, then in the first place it
  would be necessary that they should all have in them one and the
  same faculty of sensation, arising out of irresistible
  impressions; in the second place, they must have love, in which
  pleasure and pain mingle; also fear and anger, and the feelings
  which are akin or opposite to them; if they conquered these they
  would live righteously, and if they were conquered by them,
  unrighteously. He who lived well during his appointed time was to
  return and dwell in his native star, and there he would have a
  blessed and congenial existence. But if he failed in attaining
  this, at the second birth he would pass into a woman, and if,
  when in that state of being, he did not desist from evil, he
  would continually be changed into some brute who resembled him in
  the evil nature which he had acquired, and would not cease from
  his toils and transformations until he followed the revolution of
  the same and the like within him, and overcame by the help of
  reason the turbulent and irrational mob of later accretions, made
  up of fire and air and water and earth, and returned to the form
  of his first and better state. Having given all these laws to his
  creatures, that he might be guiltless of future evil in any of
  them, the creator sowed some of them in the earth, and some in
  the moon, and some in the other instruments of time; and when he
  had sown them he committed to the younger gods the fashioning of
  their mortal bodies, and desired them to furnish what was still
  lacking to the human soul, and having made all the suitable
  additions, to rule over them, and to pilot the mortal animal in
  the best and wisest manner which they could, and avert from him
  all but self-inflicted evils.

  When the creator had made all these ordinances he remained in his
  own accustomed nature, and his children heard and were obedient
  to their father’s word, and receiving from him the immortal
  principle of a mortal creature, in imitation of their own creator
  they borrowed portions of fire, and earth, and water, and air
  from the world, which were hereafter to be restored—these they
  took and welded them together, not with the indissoluble chains
  by which they were themselves bound, but with little pegs too
  small to be visible, making up out of all the four elements each
  separate body, and fastening the courses of the immortal soul in
  a body which was in a state of perpetual influx and efflux. Now
  these courses, detained as in a vast river, neither overcame nor
  were overcome; but were hurrying and hurried to and fro, so that
  the whole animal was moved and progressed, irregularly however
  and irrationally and anyhow, in all the six directions of motion,
  wandering backwards and forwards, and right and left, and up and
  down, and in all the six directions. For great as was the
  advancing and retiring flood which provided nourishment, the
  affections produced by external contact caused still greater
  tumult—when the body of any one met and came into collision with
  some external fire, or with the solid earth or the gliding
  waters, or was caught in the tempest borne on the air, and the
  motions produced by any of these impulses were carried through
  the body to the soul. All such motions have consequently received
  the general name of ‘sensations,’ which they still retain. And
  they did in fact at that time create a very great and mighty
  movement; uniting with the ever-flowing stream in stirring up and
  violently shaking the courses of the soul, they completely
  stopped the revolution of the same by their opposing current, and
  hindered it from predominating and advancing; and they so
  disturbed the nature of the other or diverse, that the three
  double intervals (i.e. between 1, 2, 4, 8), and the three triple
  intervals (i.e. between 1, 3, 9, 27), together with the mean
  terms and connecting links which are expressed by the ratios of
  3:2, and 4:3, and of 9:8—these, although they cannot be wholly
  undone except by him who united them, were twisted by them in all
  sorts of ways, and the circles were broken and disordered in
  every possible manner, so that when they moved they were tumbling
  to pieces, and moved irrationally, at one time in a reverse
  direction, and then again obliquely, and then upside down, as you
  might imagine a person who is upside down and has his head
  leaning upon the ground and his feet up against something in the
  air; and when he is in such a position, both he and the spectator
  fancy that the right of either is his left, and the left right.
  If, when powerfully experiencing these and similar effects, the
  revolutions of the soul come in contact with some external thing,
  either of the class of the same or of the other, they speak of
  the same or of the other in a manner the very opposite of the
  truth; and they become false and foolish, and there is no course
  or revolution in them which has a guiding or directing power; and
  if again any sensations enter in violently from without and drag
  after them the whole vessel of the soul, then the courses of the
  soul, though they seem to conquer, are really conquered.

  And by reason of all these affections, the soul, when encased in
  a mortal body, now, as in the beginning, is at first without
  intelligence; but when the flood of growth and nutriment abates,
  and the courses of the soul, calming down, go their own way and
  become steadier as time goes on, then the several circles return
  to their natural form, and their revolutions are corrected, and
  they call the same and the other by their right names, and make
  the possessor of them to become a rational being. And if these
  combine in him with any true nurture or education, he attains the
  fulness and health of the perfect man, and escapes the worst
  disease of all; but if he neglects education he walks lame to the
  end of his life, and returns imperfect and good for nothing to
  the world below. This, however, is a later stage; at present we
  must treat more exactly the subject before us, which involves a
  preliminary enquiry into the generation of the body and its
  members, and as to how the soul was created—for what reason and
  by what providence of the gods; and holding fast to probability,
  we must pursue our way.

  First, then, the gods, imitating the spherical shape of the
  universe, enclosed the two divine courses in a spherical body,
  that, namely, which we now term the head, being the most divine
  part of us and the lord of all that is in us: to this the gods,
  when they put together the body, gave all the other members to be
  servants, considering that it partook of every sort of motion. In
  order then that it might not tumble about among the high and deep
  places of the earth, but might be able to get over the one and
  out of the other, they provided the body to be its vehicle and
  means of locomotion; which consequently had length and was
  furnished with four limbs extended and flexible; these God
  contrived to be instruments of locomotion with which it might
  take hold and find support, and so be able to pass through all
  places, carrying on high the dwelling-place of the most sacred
  and divine part of us. Such was the origin of legs and hands,
  which for this reason were attached to every man; and the gods,
  deeming the front part of man to be more honourable and more fit
  to command than the hinder part, made us to move mostly in a
  forward direction. Wherefore man must needs have his front part
  unlike and distinguished from the rest of his body.

  And so in the vessel of the head, they first of all put a face in
  which they inserted organs to minister in all things to the
  providence of the soul, and they appointed this part, which has
  authority, to be by nature the part which is in front. And of the
  organs they first contrived the eyes to give light, and the
  principle according to which they were inserted was as follows:
  So much of fire as would not burn, but gave a gentle light, they
  formed into a substance akin to the light of every-day life; and
  the pure fire which is within us and related thereto they made to
  flow through the eyes in a stream smooth and dense, compressing
  the whole eye, and especially the centre part, so that it kept
  out everything of a coarser nature, and allowed to pass only this
  pure element. When the light of day surrounds the stream of
  vision, then like falls upon like, and they coalesce, and one
  body is formed by natural affinity in the line of vision,
  wherever the light that falls from within meets with an external
  object. And the whole stream of vision, being similarly affected
  in virtue of similarity, diffuses the motions of what it touches
  or what touches it over the whole body, until they reach the
  soul, causing that perception which we call sight. But when night
  comes on and the external and kindred fire departs, then the
  stream of vision is cut off; for going forth to an unlike element
  it is changed and extinguished, being no longer of one nature
  with the surrounding atmosphere which is now deprived of fire:
  and so the eye no longer sees, and we feel disposed to sleep. For
  when the eyelids, which the gods invented for the preservation of
  sight, are closed, they keep in the internal fire; and the power
  of the fire diffuses and equalizes the inward motions; when they
  are equalized, there is rest, and when the rest is profound,
  sleep comes over us scarce disturbed by dreams; but where the
  greater motions still remain, of whatever nature and in whatever
  locality, they engender corresponding visions in dreams, which
  are remembered by us when we are awake and in the external world.
  And now there is no longer any difficulty in understanding the
  creation of images in mirrors and all smooth and bright surfaces.
  For from the communion of the internal and external fires, and
  again from the union of them and their numerous transformations
  when they meet in the mirror, all these appearances of necessity
  arise, when the fire from the face coalesces with the fire from
  the eye on the bright and smooth surface. And right appears left
  and left right, because the visual rays come into contact with
  the rays emitted by the object in a manner contrary to the usual
  mode of meeting; but the right appears right, and the left left,
  when the position of one of the two concurring lights is
  reversed; and this happens when the mirror is concave and its
  smooth surface repels the right stream of vision to the left
  side, and the left to the right (He is speaking of two kinds of
  mirrors, first the plane, secondly the concave; and the latter is
  supposed to be placed, first horizontally, and then vertically.).
  Or if the mirror be turned vertically, then the concavity makes
  the countenance appear to be all upside down, and the lower rays
  are driven upwards and the upper downwards.

  All these are to be reckoned among the second and co-operative
  causes which God, carrying into execution the idea of the best as
  far as possible, uses as his ministers. They are thought by most
  men not to be the second, but the prime causes of all things,
  because they freeze and heat, and contract and dilate, and the
  like. But they are not so, for they are incapable of reason or
  intellect; the only being which can properly have mind is the
  invisible soul, whereas fire and water, and earth and air, are
  all of them visible bodies. The lover of intellect and knowledge
  ought to explore causes of intelligent nature first of all, and,
  secondly, of those things which, being moved by others, are
  compelled to move others. And this is what we too must do. Both
  kinds of causes should be acknowledged by us, but a distinction
  should be made between those which are endowed with mind and are
  the workers of things fair and good, and those which are deprived
  of intelligence and always produce chance effects without order
  or design. Of the second or co-operative causes of sight, which
  help to give to the eyes the power which they now possess, enough
  has been said. I will therefore now proceed to speak of the
  higher use and purpose for which God has given them to us. The
  sight in my opinion is the source of the greatest benefit to us,
  for had we never seen the stars, and the sun, and the heaven,
  none of the words which we have spoken about the universe would
  ever have been uttered. But now the sight of day and night, and
  the months and the revolutions of the years, have created number,
  and have given us a conception of time, and the power of
  enquiring about the nature of the universe; and from this source
  we have derived philosophy, than which no greater good ever was
  or will be given by the gods to mortal man. This is the greatest
  boon of sight: and of the lesser benefits why should I speak?
  even the ordinary man if he were deprived of them would bewail
  his loss, but in vain. Thus much let me say however: God invented
  and gave us sight to the end that we might behold the courses of
  intelligence in the heaven, and apply them to the courses of our
  own intelligence which are akin to them, the unperturbed to the
  perturbed; and that we, learning them and partaking of the
  natural truth of reason, might imitate the absolutely unerring
  courses of God and regulate our own vagaries. The same may be
  affirmed of speech and hearing: they have been given by the gods
  to the same end and for a like reason. For this is the principal
  end of speech, whereto it most contributes. Moreover, so much of
  music as is adapted to the sound of the voice and to the sense of
  hearing is granted to us for the sake of harmony; and harmony,
  which has motions akin to the revolutions of our souls, is not
  regarded by the intelligent votary of the Muses as given by them
  with a view to irrational pleasure, which is deemed to be the
  purpose of it in our day, but as meant to correct any discord
  which may have arisen in the courses of the soul, and to be our
  ally in bringing her into harmony and agreement with herself; and
  rhythm too was given by them for the same reason, on account of
  the irregular and graceless ways which prevail among mankind
  generally, and to help us against them.

  Thus far in what we have been saying, with small exception, the
  works of intelligence have been set forth; and now we must place
  by the side of them in our discourse the things which come into
  being through necessity—for the creation is mixed, being made up
  of necessity and mind. Mind, the ruling power, persuaded
  necessity to bring the greater part of created things to
  perfection, and thus and after this manner in the beginning, when
  the influence of reason got the better of necessity, the universe
  was created. But if a person will truly tell of the way in which
  the work was accomplished, he must include the other influence of
  the variable cause as well. Wherefore, we must return again and
  find another suitable beginning, as about the former matters, so
  also about these. To which end we must consider the nature of
  fire, and water, and air, and earth, such as they were prior to
  the creation of the heaven, and what was happening to them in
  this previous state; for no one has as yet explained the manner
  of their generation, but we speak of fire and the rest of them,
  whatever they mean, as though men knew their natures, and we
  maintain them to be the first principles and letters or elements
  of the whole, when they cannot reasonably be compared by a man of
  any sense even to syllables or first compounds. And let me say
  thus much: I will not now speak of the first principle or
  principles of all things, or by whatever name they are to be
  called, for this reason—because it is difficult to set forth my
  opinion according to the method of discussion which we are at
  present employing. Do not imagine, any more than I can bring
  myself to imagine, that I should be right in undertaking so great
  and difficult a task. Remembering what I said at first about
  probability, I will do my best to give as probable an explanation
  as any other—or rather, more probable; and I will first go back
  to the beginning and try to speak of each thing and of all. Once
  more, then, at the commencement of my discourse, I call upon God,
  and beg him to be our saviour out of a strange and unwonted
  enquiry, and to bring us to the haven of probability. So now let
  us begin again.

  This new beginning of our discussion of the universe requires a
  fuller division than the former; for then we made two classes,
  now a third must be revealed. The two sufficed for the former
  discussion: one, which we assumed, was a pattern intelligible and
  always the same; and the second was only the imitation of the
  pattern, generated and visible. There is also a third kind which
  we did not distinguish at the time, conceiving that the two would
  be enough. But now the argument seems to require that we should
  set forth in words another kind, which is difficult of
  explanation and dimly seen. What nature are we to attribute to
  this new kind of being? We reply, that it is the receptacle, and
  in a manner the nurse, of all generation. I have spoken the
  truth; but I must express myself in clearer language, and this
  will be an arduous task for many reasons, and in particular
  because I must first raise questions concerning fire and the
  other elements, and determine what each of them is; for to say,
  with any probability or certitude, which of them should be called
  water rather than fire, and which should be called any of them
  rather than all or some one of them, is a difficult matter. How,
  then, shall we settle this point, and what questions about the
  elements may be fairly raised?

  In the first place, we see that what we just now called water, by
  condensation, I suppose, becomes stone and earth; and this same
  element, when melted and dispersed, passes into vapour and air.
  Air, again, when inflamed, becomes fire; and again fire, when
  condensed and extinguished, passes once more into the form of
  air; and once more, air, when collected and condensed, produces
  cloud and mist; and from these, when still more compressed, comes
  flowing water, and from water comes earth and stones once more;
  and thus generation appears to be transmitted from one to the
  other in a circle. Thus, then, as the several elements never
  present themselves in the same form, how can any one have the
  assurance to assert positively that any of them, whatever it may
  be, is one thing rather than another? No one can. But much the
  safest plan is to speak of them as follows:—Anything which we see
  to be continually changing, as, for example, fire, we must not
  call ‘this’ or ‘that,’ but rather say that it is ‘of such a
  nature’; nor let us speak of water as ‘this’; but always as
  ‘such’; nor must we imply that there is any stability in any of
  those things which we indicate by the use of the words ‘this’ and
  ‘that,’ supposing ourselves to signify something thereby; for
  they are too volatile to be detained in any such expressions as
  ‘this,’ or ‘that,’ or ‘relative to this,’ or any other mode of
  speaking which represents them as permanent. We ought not to
  apply ‘this’ to any of them, but rather the word ‘such’; which
  expresses the similar principle circulating in each and all of
  them; for example, that should be called ‘fire’ which is of such
  a nature always, and so of everything that has generation. That
  in which the elements severally grow up, and appear, and decay,
  is alone to be called by the name ‘this’ or ‘that’; but that
  which is of a certain nature, hot or white, or anything which
  admits of opposite qualities, and all things that are compounded
  of them, ought not to be so denominated. Let me make another
  attempt to explain my meaning more clearly. Suppose a person to
  make all kinds of figures of gold and to be always transmuting
  one form into all the rest;—somebody points to one of them and
  asks what it is. By far the safest and truest answer is, That is
  gold; and not to call the triangle or any other figures which are
  formed in the gold ‘these,’ as though they had existence, since
  they are in process of change while he is making the assertion;
  but if the questioner be willing to take the safe and indefinite
  expression, ‘such,’ we should be satisfied. And the same argument
  applies to the universal nature which receives all bodies—that
  must be always called the same; for, while receiving all things,
  she never departs at all from her own nature, and never in any
  way, or at any time, assumes a form like that of any of the
  things which enter into her; she is the natural recipient of all
  impressions, and is stirred and informed by them, and appears
  different from time to time by reason of them. But the forms
  which enter into and go out of her are the likenesses of real
  existences modelled after their patterns in a wonderful and
  inexplicable manner, which we will hereafter investigate. For the
  present we have only to conceive of three natures: first, that
  which is in process of generation; secondly, that in which the
  generation takes place; and thirdly, that of which the thing
  generated is a resemblance. And we may liken the receiving
  principle to a mother, and the source or spring to a father, and
  the intermediate nature to a child; and may remark further, that
  if the model is to take every variety of form, then the matter in
  which the model is fashioned will not be duly prepared, unless it
  is formless, and free from the impress of any of those shapes
  which it is hereafter to receive from without. For if the matter
  were like any of the supervening forms, then whenever any
  opposite or entirely different nature was stamped upon its
  surface, it would take the impression badly, because it would
  intrude its own shape. Wherefore, that which is to receive all
  forms should have no form; as in making perfumes they first
  contrive that the liquid substance which is to receive the scent
  shall be as inodorous as possible; or as those who wish to
  impress figures on soft substances do not allow any previous
  impression to remain, but begin by making the surface as even and
  smooth as possible. In the same way that which is to receive
  perpetually and through its whole extent the resemblances of all
  eternal beings ought to be devoid of any particular form.
  Wherefore, the mother and receptacle of all created and visible
  and in any way sensible things, is not to be termed earth, or
  air, or fire, or water, or any of their compounds or any of the
  elements from which these are derived, but is an invisible and
  formless being which receives all things and in some mysterious
  way partakes of the intelligible, and is most incomprehensible.
  In saying this we shall not be far wrong; as far, however, as we
  can attain to a knowledge of her from the previous
  considerations, we may truly say that fire is that part of her
  nature which from time to time is inflamed, and water that which
  is moistened, and that the mother substance becomes earth and
  air, in so far as she receives the impressions of them.

  Let us consider this question more precisely. Is there any
  self-existent fire? and do all those things which we call
  self-existent exist? or are only those things which we see, or in
  some way perceive through the bodily organs, truly existent, and
  nothing whatever besides them? And is all that which we call an
  intelligible essence nothing at all, and only a name? Here is a
  question which we must not leave unexamined or undetermined, nor
  must we affirm too confidently that there can be no decision;
  neither must we interpolate in our present long discourse a
  digression equally long, but if it is possible to set forth a
  great principle in a few words, that is just what we want.

  Thus I state my view:—If mind and true opinion are two distinct
  classes, then I say that there certainly are these self-existent
  ideas unperceived by sense, and apprehended only by the mind; if,
  however, as some say, true opinion differs in no respect from
  mind, then everything that we perceive through the body is to be
  regarded as most real and certain. But we must affirm them to be
  distinct, for they have a distinct origin and are of a different
  nature; the one is implanted in us by instruction, the other by
  persuasion; the one is always accompanied by true reason, the
  other is without reason; the one cannot be overcome by
  persuasion, but the other can: and lastly, every man may be said
  to share in true opinion, but mind is the attribute of the gods
  and of very few men. Wherefore also we must acknowledge that
  there is one kind of being which is always the same, uncreated
  and indestructible, never receiving anything into itself from
  without, nor itself going out to any other, but invisible and
  imperceptible by any sense, and of which the contemplation is
  granted to intelligence only. And there is another nature of the
  same name with it, and like to it, perceived by sense, created,
  always in motion, becoming in place and again vanishing out of
  place, which is apprehended by opinion and sense. And there is a
  third nature, which is space, and is eternal, and admits not of
  destruction and provides a home for all created things, and is
  apprehended without the help of sense, by a kind of spurious
  reason, and is hardly real; which we beholding as in a dream, say
  of all existence that it must of necessity be in some place and
  occupy a space, but that what is neither in heaven nor in earth
  has no existence. Of these and other things of the same kind,
  relating to the true and waking reality of nature, we have only
  this dreamlike sense, and we are unable to cast off sleep and
  determine the truth about them. For an image, since the reality,
  after which it is modelled, does not belong to it, and it exists
  ever as the fleeting shadow of some other, must be inferred to be
  in another (i.e. in space), grasping existence in some way or
  other, or it could not be at all. But true and exact reason,
  vindicating the nature of true being, maintains that while two
  things (i.e. the image and space) are different they cannot exist
  one of them in the other and so be one and also two at the same
  time.

  Thus have I concisely given the result of my thoughts; and my
  verdict is that being and space and generation, these three,
  existed in their three ways before the heaven; and that the nurse
  of generation, moistened by water and inflamed by fire, and
  receiving the forms of earth and air, and experiencing all the
  affections which accompany these, presented a strange variety of
  appearances; and being full of powers which were neither similar
  nor equally balanced, was never in any part in a state of
  equipoise, but swaying unevenly hither and thither, was shaken by
  them, and by its motion again shook them; and the elements when
  moved were separated and carried continually, some one way, some
  another; as, when grain is shaken and winnowed by fans and other
  instruments used in the threshing of corn, the close and heavy
  particles are borne away and settle in one direction, and the
  loose and light particles in another. In this manner, the four
  kinds or elements were then shaken by the receiving vessel,
  which, moving like a winnowing machine, scattered far away from
  one another the elements most unlike, and forced the most similar
  elements into close contact. Wherefore also the various elements
  had different places before they were arranged so as to form the
  universe. At first, they were all without reason and measure. But
  when the world began to get into order, fire and water and earth
  and air had only certain faint traces of themselves, and were
  altogether such as everything might be expected to be in the
  absence of God; this, I say, was their nature at that time, and
  God fashioned them by form and number. Let it be consistently
  maintained by us in all that we say that God made them as far as
  possible the fairest and best, out of things which were not fair
  and good. And now I will endeavour to show you the disposition
  and generation of them by an unaccustomed argument, which I am
  compelled to use; but I believe that you will be able to follow
  me, for your education has made you familiar with the methods of
  science.

  In the first place, then, as is evident to all, fire and earth
  and water and air are bodies. And every sort of body possesses
  solidity, and every solid must necessarily be contained in
  planes; and every plane rectilinear figure is composed of
  triangles; and all triangles are originally of two kinds, both of
  which are made up of one right and two acute angles; one of them
  has at either end of the base the half of a divided right angle,
  having equal sides, while in the other the right angle is divided
  into unequal parts, having unequal sides. These, then, proceeding
  by a combination of probability with demonstration, we assume to
  be the original elements of fire and the other bodies; but the
  principles which are prior to these God only knows, and he of men
  who is the friend of God. And next we have to determine what are
  the four most beautiful bodies which are unlike one another, and
  of which some are capable of resolution into one another; for
  having discovered thus much, we shall know the true origin of
  earth and fire and of the proportionate and intermediate
  elements. And then we shall not be willing to allow that there
  are any distinct kinds of visible bodies fairer than these.
  Wherefore we must endeavour to construct the four forms of bodies
  which excel in beauty, and then we shall be able to say that we
  have sufficiently apprehended their nature. Now of the two
  triangles, the isosceles has one form only; the scalene or
  unequal-sided has an infinite number. Of the infinite forms we
  must select the most beautiful, if we are to proceed in due
  order, and any one who can point out a more beautiful form than
  ours for the construction of these bodies, shall carry off the
  palm, not as an enemy, but as a friend. Now, the one which we
  maintain to be the most beautiful of all the many triangles (and
  we need not speak of the others) is that of which the double
  forms a third triangle which is equilateral; the reason of this
  would be long to tell; he who disproves what we are saying, and
  shows that we are mistaken, may claim a friendly victory. Then
  let us choose two triangles, out of which fire and the other
  elements have been constructed, one isosceles, the other having
  the square of the longer side equal to three times the square of
  the lesser side.

  Now is the time to explain what was before obscurely said: there
  was an error in imagining that all the four elements might be
  generated by and into one another; this, I say, was an erroneous
  supposition, for there are generated from the triangles which we
  have selected four kinds—three from the one which has the sides
  unequal; the fourth alone is framed out of the isosceles
  triangle. Hence they cannot all be resolved into one another, a
  great number of small bodies being combined into a few large
  ones, or the converse. But three of them can be thus resolved and
  compounded, for they all spring from one, and when the greater
  bodies are broken up, many small bodies will spring up out of
  them and take their own proper figures; or, again, when many
  small bodies are dissolved into their triangles, if they become
  one, they will form one large mass of another kind. So much for
  their passage into one another. I have now to speak of their
  several kinds, and show out of what combinations of numbers each
  of them was formed. The first will be the simplest and smallest
  construction, and its element is that triangle which has its
  hypotenuse twice the lesser side. When two such triangles are
  joined at the diagonal, and this is repeated three times, and the
  triangles rest their diagonals and shorter sides on the same
  point as a centre, a single equilateral triangle is formed out of
  six triangles; and four equilateral triangles, if put together,
  make out of every three plane angles one solid angle, being that
  which is nearest to the most obtuse of plane angles; and out of
  the combination of these four angles arises the first solid form
  which distributes into equal and similar parts the whole circle
  in which it is inscribed. The second species of solid is formed
  out of the same triangles, which unite as eight equilateral
  triangles and form one solid angle out of four plane angles, and
  out of six such angles the second body is completed. And the
  third body is made up of 120 triangular elements, forming twelve
  solid angles, each of them included in five plane equilateral
  triangles, having altogether twenty bases, each of which is an
  equilateral triangle. The one element (that is, the triangle
  which has its hypotenuse twice the lesser side) having generated
  these figures, generated no more; but the isosceles triangle
  produced the fourth elementary figure, which is compounded of
  four such triangles, joining their right angles in a centre, and
  forming one equilateral quadrangle. Six of these united form
  eight solid angles, each of which is made by the combination of
  three plane right angles; the figure of the body thus composed is
  a cube, having six plane quadrangular equilateral bases. There
  was yet a fifth combination which God used in the delineation of
  the universe.

  Now, he who, duly reflecting on all this, enquires whether the
  worlds are to be regarded as indefinite or definite in number,
  will be of opinion that the notion of their indefiniteness is
  characteristic of a sadly indefinite and ignorant mind. He,
  however, who raises the question whether they are to be truly
  regarded as one or five, takes up a more reasonable position.
  Arguing from probabilities, I am of opinion that they are one;
  another, regarding the question from another point of view, will
  be of another mind. But, leaving this enquiry, let us proceed to
  distribute the elementary forms, which have now been created in
  idea, among the four elements.

  To earth, then, let us assign the cubical form; for earth is the
  most immoveable of the four and the most plastic of all bodies,
  and that which has the most stable bases must of necessity be of
  such a nature. Now, of the triangles which we assumed at first,
  that which has two equal sides is by nature more firmly based
  than that which has unequal sides; and of the compound figures
  which are formed out of either, the plane equilateral quadrangle
  has necessarily a more stable basis than the equilateral
  triangle, both in the whole and in the parts. Wherefore, in
  assigning this figure to earth, we adhere to probability; and to
  water we assign that one of the remaining forms which is the
  least moveable; and the most moveable of them to fire; and to air
  that which is intermediate. Also we assign the smallest body to
  fire, and the greatest to water, and the intermediate in size to
  air; and, again, the acutest body to fire, and the next in
  acuteness to air, and the third to water. Of all these elements,
  that which has the fewest bases must necessarily be the most
  moveable, for it must be the acutest and most penetrating in
  every way, and also the lightest as being composed of the
  smallest number of similar particles: and the second body has
  similar properties in a second degree, and the third body in the
  third degree. Let it be agreed, then, both according to strict
  reason and according to probability, that the pyramid is the
  solid which is the original element and seed of fire; and let us
  assign the element which was next in the order of generation to
  air, and the third to water. We must imagine all these to be so
  small that no single particle of any of the four kinds is seen by
  us on account of their smallness: but when many of them are
  collected together their aggregates are seen. And the ratios of
  their numbers, motions, and other properties, everywhere God, as
  far as necessity allowed or gave consent, has exactly perfected,
  and harmonized in due proportion.

  From all that we have just been saying about the elements or
  kinds, the most probable conclusion is as follows:—earth, when
  meeting with fire and dissolved by its sharpness, whether the
  dissolution take place in the fire itself or perhaps in some mass
  of air or water, is borne hither and thither, until its parts,
  meeting together and mutually harmonising, again become earth;
  for they can never take any other form. But water, when divided
  by fire or by air, on re-forming, may become one part fire and
  two parts air; and a single volume of air divided becomes two of
  fire. Again, when a small body of fire is contained in a larger
  body of air or water or earth, and both are moving, and the fire
  struggling is overcome and broken up, then two volumes of fire
  form one volume of air; and when air is overcome and cut up into
  small pieces, two and a half parts of air are condensed into one
  part of water. Let us consider the matter in another way. When
  one of the other elements is fastened upon by fire, and is cut by
  the sharpness of its angles and sides, it coalesces with the
  fire, and then ceases to be cut by them any longer. For no
  element which is one and the same with itself can be changed by
  or change another of the same kind and in the same state. But so
  long as in the process of transition the weaker is fighting
  against the stronger, the dissolution continues. Again, when a
  few small particles, enclosed in many larger ones, are in process
  of decomposition and extinction, they only cease from their
  tendency to extinction when they consent to pass into the
  conquering nature, and fire becomes air and air water. But if
  bodies of another kind go and attack them (i.e. the small
  particles), the latter continue to be dissolved until, being
  completely forced back and dispersed, they make their escape to
  their own kindred, or else, being overcome and assimilated to the
  conquering power, they remain where they are and dwell with their
  victors, and from being many become one. And owing to these
  affections, all things are changing their place, for by the
  motion of the receiving vessel the bulk of each class is
  distributed into its proper place; but those things which become
  unlike themselves and like other things, are hurried by the
  shaking into the place of the things to which they grow like.

  Now all unmixed and primary bodies are produced by such causes as
  these. As to the subordinate species which are included in the
  greater kinds, they are to be attributed to the varieties in the
  structure of the two original triangles. For either structure did
  not originally produce the triangle of one size only, but some
  larger and some smaller, and there are as many sizes as there are
  species of the four elements. Hence when they are mingled with
  themselves and with one another there is an endless variety of
  them, which those who would arrive at the probable truth of
  nature ought duly to consider.

  Unless a person comes to an understanding about the nature and
  conditions of rest and motion, he will meet with many
  difficulties in the discussion which follows. Something has been
  said of this matter already, and something more remains to be
  said, which is, that motion never exists in what is uniform. For
  to conceive that anything can be moved without a mover is hard or
  indeed impossible, and equally impossible to conceive that there
  can be a mover unless there be something which can be
  moved—motion cannot exist where either of these are wanting, and
  for these to be uniform is impossible; wherefore we must assign
  rest to uniformity and motion to the want of uniformity. Now
  inequality is the cause of the nature which is wanting in
  uniformity; and of this we have already described the origin. But
  there still remains the further point—why things when divided
  after their kinds do not cease to pass through one another and to
  change their place—which we will now proceed to explain. In the
  revolution of the universe are comprehended all the four
  elements, and this being circular and having a tendency to come
  together, compresses everything and will not allow any place to
  be left void. Wherefore, also, fire above all things penetrates
  everywhere, and air next, as being next in rarity of the
  elements; and the two other elements in like manner penetrate
  according to their degrees of rarity. For those things which are
  composed of the largest particles have the largest void left in
  their compositions, and those which are composed of the smallest
  particles have the least. And the contraction caused by the
  compression thrusts the smaller particles into the interstices of
  the larger. And thus, when the small parts are placed side by
  side with the larger, and the lesser divide the greater and the
  greater unite the lesser, all the elements are borne up and down
  and hither and thither towards their own places; for the change
  in the size of each changes its position in space. And these
  causes generate an inequality which is always maintained, and is
  continually creating a perpetual motion of the elements in all
  time.

  In the next place we have to consider that there are divers kinds
  of fire. There are, for example, first, flame; and secondly,
  those emanations of flame which do not burn but only give light
  to the eyes; thirdly, the remains of fire, which are seen in
  red-hot embers after the flame has been extinguished. There are
  similar differences in the air; of which the brightest part is
  called the aether, and the most turbid sort mist and darkness;
  and there are various other nameless kinds which arise from the
  inequality of the triangles. Water, again, admits in the first
  place of a division into two kinds; the one liquid and the other
  fusile. The liquid kind is composed of the small and unequal
  particles of water; and moves itself and is moved by other bodies
  owing to the want of uniformity and the shape of its particles;
  whereas the fusile kind, being formed of large and uniform
  particles, is more stable than the other, and is heavy and
  compact by reason of its uniformity. But when fire gets in and
  dissolves the particles and destroys the uniformity, it has
  greater mobility, and becoming fluid is thrust forth by the
  neighbouring air and spreads upon the earth; and this dissolution
  of the solid masses is called melting, and their spreading out
  upon the earth flowing. Again, when the fire goes out of the
  fusile substance, it does not pass into a vacuum, but into the
  neighbouring air; and the air which is displaced forces together
  the liquid and still moveable mass into the place which was
  occupied by the fire, and unites it with itself. Thus compressed
  the mass resumes its equability, and is again at unity with
  itself, because the fire which was the author of the inequality
  has retreated; and this departure of the fire is called cooling,
  and the coming together which follows upon it is termed
  congealment. Of all the kinds termed fusile, that which is the
  densest and is formed out of the finest and most uniform parts is
  that most precious possession called gold, which is hardened by
  filtration through rock; this is unique in kind, and has both a
  glittering and a yellow colour. A shoot of gold, which is so
  dense as to be very hard, and takes a black colour, is termed
  adamant. There is also another kind which has parts nearly like
  gold, and of which there are several species; it is denser than
  gold, and it contains a small and fine portion of earth, and is
  therefore harder, yet also lighter because of the great
  interstices which it has within itself; and this substance, which
  is one of the bright and denser kinds of water, when solidified
  is called copper. There is an alloy of earth mingled with it,
  which, when the two parts grow old and are disunited, shows
  itself separately and is called rust. The remaining phenomena of
  the same kind there will be no difficulty in reasoning out by the
  method of probabilities. A man may sometimes set aside
  meditations about eternal things, and for recreation turn to
  consider the truths of generation which are probable only; he
  will thus gain a pleasure not to be repented of, and secure for
  himself while he lives a wise and moderate pastime. Let us grant
  ourselves this indulgence, and go through the probabilities
  relating to the same subjects which follow next in order.

  Water which is mingled with fire, so much as is fine and liquid
  (being so called by reason of its motion and the way in which it
  rolls along the ground), and soft, because its bases give way and
  are less stable than those of earth, when separated from fire and
  air and isolated, becomes more uniform, and by their retirement
  is compressed into itself; and if the condensation be very great,
  the water above the earth becomes hail, but on the earth, ice;
  and that which is congealed in a less degree and is only half
  solid, when above the earth is called snow, and when upon the
  earth, and condensed from dew, hoar-frost. Then, again, there are
  the numerous kinds of water which have been mingled with one
  another, and are distilled through plants which grow in the
  earth; and this whole class is called by the name of juices or
  saps. The unequal admixture of these fluids creates a variety of
  species; most of them are nameless, but four which are of a fiery
  nature are clearly distinguished and have names. First, there is
  wine, which warms the soul as well as the body: secondly, there
  is the oily nature, which is smooth and divides the visual ray,
  and for this reason is bright and shining and of a glistening
  appearance, including pitch, the juice of the castor berry, oil
  itself, and other things of a like kind: thirdly, there is the
  class of substances which expand the contracted parts of the
  mouth, until they return to their natural state, and by reason of
  this property create sweetness;—these are included under the
  general name of honey: and, lastly, there is a frothy nature,
  which differs from all juices, having a burning quality which
  dissolves the flesh; it is called opos (a vegetable acid).

  As to the kinds of earth, that which is filtered through water
  passes into stone in the following manner:—The water which mixes
  with the earth and is broken up in the process changes into air,
  and taking this form mounts into its own place. But as there is
  no surrounding vacuum it thrusts away the neighbouring air, and
  this being rendered heavy, and, when it is displaced, having been
  poured around the mass of earth, forcibly compresses it and
  drives it into the vacant space whence the new air had come up;
  and the earth when compressed by the air into an indissoluble
  union with water becomes rock. The fairer sort is that which is
  made up of equal and similar parts and is transparent; that which
  has the opposite qualities is inferior. But when all the watery
  part is suddenly drawn out by fire, a more brittle substance is
  formed, to which we give the name of pottery. Sometimes also
  moisture may remain, and the earth which has been fused by fire
  becomes, when cool, a certain stone of a black colour. A like
  separation of the water which had been copiously mingled with
  them may occur in two substances composed of finer particles of
  earth and of a briny nature; out of either of them a
  half-solid-body is then formed, soluble in water—the one, soda,
  which is used for purging away oil and earth, the other, salt,
  which harmonizes so well in combinations pleasing to the palate,
  and is, as the law testifies, a substance dear to the gods. The
  compounds of earth and water are not soluble by water, but by
  fire only, and for this reason:—Neither fire nor air melt masses
  of earth; for their particles, being smaller than the interstices
  in its structure, have plenty of room to move without forcing
  their way, and so they leave the earth unmelted and undissolved;
  but particles of water, which are larger, force a passage, and
  dissolve and melt the earth. Wherefore earth when not
  consolidated by force is dissolved by water only; when
  consolidated, by nothing but fire; for this is the only body
  which can find an entrance. The cohesion of water again, when
  very strong, is dissolved by fire only—when weaker, then either
  by air or fire—the former entering the interstices, and the
  latter penetrating even the triangles. But nothing can dissolve
  air, when strongly condensed, which does not reach the elements
  or triangles; or if not strongly condensed, then only fire can
  dissolve it. As to bodies composed of earth and water, while the
  water occupies the vacant interstices of the earth in them which
  are compressed by force, the particles of water which approach
  them from without, finding no entrance, flow around the entire
  mass and leave it undissolved; but the particles of fire,
  entering into the interstices of the water, do to the water what
  water does to earth and fire to air (The text seems to be
  corrupt.), and are the sole causes of the compound body of earth
  and water liquefying and becoming fluid. Now these bodies are of
  two kinds; some of them, such as glass and the fusible sort of
  stones, have less water than they have earth; on the other hand,
  substances of the nature of wax and incense have more of water
  entering into their composition.

  I have thus shown the various classes of bodies as they are
  diversified by their forms and combinations and changes into one
  another, and now I must endeavour to set forth their affections
  and the causes of them. In the first place, the bodies which I
  have been describing are necessarily objects of sense. But we
  have not yet considered the origin of flesh, or what belongs to
  flesh, or of that part of the soul which is mortal. And these
  things cannot be adequately explained without also explaining the
  affections which are concerned with sensation, nor the latter
  without the former: and yet to explain them together is hardly
  possible; for which reason we must assume first one or the other
  and afterwards examine the nature of our hypothesis. In order,
  then, that the affections may follow regularly after the
  elements, let us presuppose the existence of body and soul.

  First, let us enquire what we mean by saying that fire is hot;
  and about this we may reason from the dividing or cutting power
  which it exercises on our bodies. We all of us feel that fire is
  sharp; and we may further consider the fineness of the sides, and
  the sharpness of the angles, and the smallness of the particles,
  and the swiftness of the motion—all this makes the action of fire
  violent and sharp, so that it cuts whatever it meets. And we must
  not forget that the original figure of fire (i.e. the pyramid),
  more than any other form, has a dividing power which cuts our
  bodies into small pieces (Kepmatizei), and thus naturally
  produces that affection which we call heat; and hence the origin
  of the name (thepmos, Kepma). Now, the opposite of this is
  sufficiently manifest; nevertheless we will not fail to describe
  it. For the larger particles of moisture which surround the body,
  entering in and driving out the lesser, but not being able to
  take their places, compress the moist principle in us; and this
  from being unequal and disturbed, is forced by them into a state
  of rest, which is due to equability and compression. But things
  which are contracted contrary to nature are by nature at war, and
  force themselves apart; and to this war and convulsion the name
  of shivering and trembling is given; and the whole affection and
  the cause of the affection are both termed cold. That is called
  hard to which our flesh yields, and soft which yields to our
  flesh; and things are also termed hard and soft relatively to one
  another. That which yields has a small base; but that which rests
  on quadrangular bases is firmly posed and belongs to the class
  which offers the greatest resistance; so too does that which is
  the most compact and therefore most repellent. The nature of the
  light and the heavy will be best understood when examined in
  connexion with our notions of above and below; for it is quite a
  mistake to suppose that the universe is parted into two regions,
  separate from and opposite to each other, the one a lower to
  which all things tend which have any bulk, and an upper to which
  things only ascend against their will. For as the universe is in
  the form of a sphere, all the extremities, being equidistant from
  the centre, are equally extremities, and the centre, which is
  equidistant from them, is equally to be regarded as the opposite
  of them all. Such being the nature of the world, when a person
  says that any of these points is above or below, may he not be
  justly charged with using an improper expression? For the centre
  of the world cannot be rightly called either above or below, but
  is the centre and nothing else; and the circumference is not the
  centre, and has in no one part of itself a different relation to
  the centre from what it has in any of the opposite parts. Indeed,
  when it is in every direction similar, how can one rightly give
  to it names which imply opposition? For if there were any solid
  body in equipoise at the centre of the universe, there would be
  nothing to draw it to this extreme rather than to that, for they
  are all perfectly similar; and if a person were to go round the
  world in a circle, he would often, when standing at the antipodes
  of his former position, speak of the same point as above and
  below; for, as I was saying just now, to speak of the whole which
  is in the form of a globe as having one part above and another
  below is not like a sensible man. The reason why these names are
  used, and the circumstances under which they are ordinarily
  applied by us to the division of the heavens, may be elucidated
  by the following supposition:—if a person were to stand in that
  part of the universe which is the appointed place of fire, and
  where there is the great mass of fire to which fiery bodies
  gather—if, I say, he were to ascend thither, and, having the
  power to do this, were to abstract particles of fire and put them
  in scales and weigh them, and then, raising the balance, were to
  draw the fire by force towards the uncongenial element of the
  air, it would be very evident that he could compel the smaller
  mass more readily than the larger; for when two things are
  simultaneously raised by one and the same power, the smaller body
  must necessarily yield to the superior power with less reluctance
  than the larger; and the larger body is called heavy and said to
  tend downwards, and the smaller body is called light and said to
  tend upwards. And we may detect ourselves who are upon the earth
  doing precisely the same thing. For we often separate earthy
  natures, and sometimes earth itself, and draw them into the
  uncongenial element of air by force and contrary to nature, both
  clinging to their kindred elements. But that which is smaller
  yields to the impulse given by us towards the dissimilar element
  more easily than the larger; and so we call the former light, and
  the place towards which it is impelled we call above, and the
  contrary state and place we call heavy and below respectively.
  Now the relations of these must necessarily vary, because the
  principal masses of the different elements hold opposite
  positions; for that which is light, heavy, below or above in one
  place will be found to be and become contrary and transverse and
  every way diverse in relation to that which is light, heavy,
  below or above in an opposite place. And about all of them this
  has to be considered:—that the tendency of each towards its
  kindred element makes the body which is moved heavy, and the
  place towards which the motion tends below, but things which have
  an opposite tendency we call by an opposite name. Such are the
  causes which we assign to these phenomena. As to the smooth and
  the rough, any one who sees them can explain the reason of them
  to another. For roughness is hardness mingled with irregularity,
  and smoothness is produced by the joint effect of uniformity and
  density.

  The most important of the affections which concern the whole body
  remains to be considered—that is, the cause of pleasure and pain
  in the perceptions of which I have been speaking, and in all
  other things which are perceived by sense through the parts of
  the body, and have both pains and pleasures attendant on them.
  Let us imagine the causes of every affection, whether of sense or
  not, to be of the following nature, remembering that we have
  already distinguished between the nature which is easy and which
  is hard to move; for this is the direction in which we must hunt
  the prey which we mean to take. A body which is of a nature to be
  easily moved, on receiving an impression however slight, spreads
  abroad the motion in a circle, the parts communicating with each
  other, until at last, reaching the principle of mind, they
  announce the quality of the agent. But a body of the opposite
  kind, being immobile, and not extending to the surrounding
  region, merely receives the impression, and does not stir any of
  the neighbouring parts; and since the parts do not distribute the
  original impression to other parts, it has no effect of motion on
  the whole animal, and therefore produces no effect on the
  patient. This is true of the bones and hair and other more earthy
  parts of the human body; whereas what was said above relates
  mainly to sight and hearing, because they have in them the
  greatest amount of fire and air. Now we must conceive of pleasure
  and pain in this way. An impression produced in us contrary to
  nature and violent, if sudden, is painful; and, again, the sudden
  return to nature is pleasant; but a gentle and gradual return is
  imperceptible and vice versa. On the other hand the impression of
  sense which is most easily produced is most readily felt, but is
  not accompanied by pleasure or pain; such, for example, are the
  affections of the sight, which, as we said above, is a body
  naturally uniting with our body in the day-time; for cuttings and
  burnings and other affections which happen to the sight do not
  give pain, nor is there pleasure when the sight returns to its
  natural state; but the sensations are clearest and strongest
  according to the manner in which the eye is affected by the
  object, and itself strikes and touches it; there is no violence
  either in the contraction or dilation of the eye. But bodies
  formed of larger particles yield to the agent only with a
  struggle; and then they impart their motions to the whole and
  cause pleasure and pain—pain when alienated from their natural
  conditions, and pleasure when restored to them. Things which
  experience gradual withdrawings and emptyings of their nature,
  and great and sudden replenishments, fail to perceive the
  emptying, but are sensible of the replenishment; and so they
  occasion no pain, but the greatest pleasure, to the mortal part
  of the soul, as is manifest in the case of perfumes. But things
  which are changed all of a sudden, and only gradually and with
  difficulty return to their own nature, have effects in every way
  opposite to the former, as is evident in the case of burnings and
  cuttings of the body.

  Thus have we discussed the general affections of the whole body,
  and the names of the agents which produce them. And now I will
  endeavour to speak of the affections of particular parts, and the
  causes and agents of them, as far as I am able. In the first
  place let us set forth what was omitted when we were speaking of
  juices, concerning the affections peculiar to the tongue. These
  too, like most of the other affections, appear to be caused by
  certain contractions and dilations, but they have besides more of
  roughness and smoothness than is found in other affections; for
  whenever earthy particles enter into the small veins which are
  the testing instruments of the tongue, reaching to the heart, and
  fall upon the moist, delicate portions of flesh—when, as they are
  dissolved, they contract and dry up the little veins, they are
  astringent if they are rougher, but if not so rough, then only
  harsh. Those of them which are of an abstergent nature, and purge
  the whole surface of the tongue, if they do it in excess, and so
  encroach as to consume some part of the flesh itself, like potash
  and soda, are all termed bitter. But the particles which are
  deficient in the alkaline quality, and which cleanse only
  moderately, are called salt, and having no bitterness or
  roughness, are regarded as rather agreeable than otherwise.
  Bodies which share in and are made smooth by the heat of the
  mouth, and which are inflamed, and again in turn inflame that
  which heats them, and which are so light that they are carried
  upwards to the sensations of the head, and cut all that comes in
  their way, by reason of these qualities in them, are all termed
  pungent. But when these same particles, refined by putrefaction,
  enter into the narrow veins, and are duly proportioned to the
  particles of earth and air which are there, they set them
  whirling about one another, and while they are in a whirl cause
  them to dash against and enter into one another, and so form
  hollows surrounding the particles that enter—which watery vessels
  of air (for a film of moisture, sometimes earthy, sometimes pure,
  is spread around the air) are hollow spheres of water; and those
  of them which are pure, are transparent, and are called bubbles,
  while those composed of the earthy liquid, which is in a state of
  general agitation and effervescence, are said to boil or
  ferment—of all these affections the cause is termed acid. And
  there is the opposite affection arising from an opposite cause,
  when the mass of entering particles, immersed in the moisture of
  the mouth, is congenial to the tongue, and smooths and oils over
  the roughness, and relaxes the parts which are unnaturally
  contracted, and contracts the parts which are relaxed, and
  disposes them all according to their nature;—that sort of remedy
  of violent affections is pleasant and agreeable to every man, and
  has the name sweet. But enough of this.

  The faculty of smell does not admit of differences of kind; for
  all smells are of a half-formed nature, and no element is so
  proportioned as to have any smell. The veins about the nose are
  too narrow to admit earth and water, and too wide to detain fire
  and air; and for this reason no one ever perceives the smell of
  any of them; but smells always proceed from bodies that are damp,
  or putrefying, or liquefying, or evaporating, and are perceptible
  only in the intermediate state, when water is changing into air
  and air into water; and all of them are either vapour or mist.
  That which is passing out of air into water is mist, and that
  which is passing from water into air is vapour; and hence all
  smells are thinner than water and thicker than air. The proof of
  this is, that when there is any obstruction to the respiration,
  and a man draws in his breath by force, then no smell filters
  through, but the air without the smell alone penetrates.
  Wherefore the varieties of smell have no name, and they have not
  many, or definite and simple kinds; but they are distinguished
  only as painful and pleasant, the one sort irritating and
  disturbing the whole cavity which is situated between the head
  and the navel, the other having a soothing influence, and
  restoring this same region to an agreeable and natural condition.

  In considering the third kind of sense, hearing, we must speak of
  the causes in which it originates. We may in general assume sound
  to be a blow which passes through the ears, and is transmitted by
  means of the air, the brain, and the blood, to the soul, and that
  hearing is the vibration of this blow, which begins in the head
  and ends in the region of the liver. The sound which moves
  swiftly is acute, and the sound which moves slowly is grave, and
  that which is regular is equable and smooth, and the reverse is
  harsh. A great body of sound is loud, and a small body of sound
  the reverse. Respecting the harmonies of sound I must hereafter
  speak.

  There is a fourth class of sensible things, having many intricate
  varieties, which must now be distinguished. They are called by
  the general name of colours, and are a flame which emanates from
  every sort of body, and has particles corresponding to the sense
  of sight. I have spoken already, in what has preceded, of the
  causes which generate sight, and in this place it will be natural
  and suitable to give a rational theory of colours.

  Of the particles coming from other bodies which fall upon the
  sight, some are smaller and some are larger, and some are equal
  to the parts of the sight itself. Those which are equal are
  imperceptible, and we call them transparent. The larger produce
  contraction, the smaller dilation, in the sight, exercising a
  power akin to that of hot and cold bodies on the flesh, or of
  astringent bodies on the tongue, or of those heating bodies which
  we termed pungent. White and black are similar effects of
  contraction and dilation in another sphere, and for this reason
  have a different appearance. Wherefore, we ought to term white
  that which dilates the visual ray, and the opposite of this is
  black. There is also a swifter motion of a different sort of fire
  which strikes and dilates the ray of sight until it reaches the
  eyes, forcing a way through their passages and melting them, and
  eliciting from them a union of fire and water which we call
  tears, being itself an opposite fire which comes to them from an
  opposite direction—the inner fire flashes forth like lightning,
  and the outer finds a way in and is extinguished in the moisture,
  and all sorts of colours are generated by the mixture. This
  affection is termed dazzling, and the object which produces it is
  called bright and flashing. There is another sort of fire which
  is intermediate, and which reaches and mingles with the moisture
  of the eye without flashing; and in this, the fire mingling with
  the ray of the moisture, produces a colour like blood, to which
  we give the name of red. A bright hue mingled with red and white
  gives the colour called auburn (Greek). The law of proportion,
  however, according to which the several colours are formed, even
  if a man knew he would be foolish in telling, for he could not
  give any necessary reason, nor indeed any tolerable or probable
  explanation of them. Again, red, when mingled with black and
  white, becomes purple, but it becomes umber (Greek) when the
  colours are burnt as well as mingled and the black is more
  thoroughly mixed with them. Flame-colour (Greek) is produced by a
  union of auburn and dun (Greek), and dun by an admixture of black
  and white; pale yellow (Greek), by an admixture of white and
  auburn. White and bright meeting, and falling upon a full black,
  become dark blue (Greek), and when dark blue mingles with white,
  a light blue (Greek) colour is formed, as flame-colour with black
  makes leek green (Greek). There will be no difficulty in seeing
  how and by what mixtures the colours derived from these are made
  according to the rules of probability. He, however, who should
  attempt to verify all this by experiment, would forget the
  difference of the human and divine nature. For God only has the
  knowledge and also the power which are able to combine many
  things into one and again resolve the one into many. But no man
  either is or ever will be able to accomplish either the one or
  the other operation.

  These are the elements, thus of necessity then subsisting, which
  the creator of the fairest and best of created things associated
  with himself, when he made the self-sufficing and most perfect
  God, using the necessary causes as his ministers in the
  accomplishment of his work, but himself contriving the good in
  all his creations. Wherefore we may distinguish two sorts of
  causes, the one divine and the other necessary, and may seek for
  the divine in all things, as far as our nature admits, with a
  view to the blessed life; but the necessary kind only for the
  sake of the divine, considering that without them and when
  isolated from them, these higher things for which we look cannot
  be apprehended or received or in any way shared by us.

  Seeing, then, that we have now prepared for our use the various
  classes of causes which are the material out of which the
  remainder of our discourse must be woven, just as wood is the
  material of the carpenter, let us revert in a few words to the
  point at which we began, and then endeavour to add on a suitable
  ending to the beginning of our tale.

  As I said at first, when all things were in disorder God created
  in each thing in relation to itself, and in all things in
  relation to each other, all the measures and harmonies which they
  could possibly receive. For in those days nothing had any
  proportion except by accident; nor did any of the things which
  now have names deserve to be named at all—as, for example, fire,
  water, and the rest of the elements. All these the creator first
  set in order, and out of them he constructed the universe, which
  was a single animal comprehending in itself all other animals,
  mortal and immortal. Now of the divine, he himself was the
  creator, but the creation of the mortal he committed to his
  offspring. And they, imitating him, received from him the
  immortal principle of the soul; and around this they proceeded to
  fashion a mortal body, and made it to be the vehicle of the soul,
  and constructed within the body a soul of another nature which
  was mortal, subject to terrible and irresistible
  affections,—first of all, pleasure, the greatest incitement to
  evil; then, pain, which deters from good; also rashness and fear,
  two foolish counsellors, anger hard to be appeased, and hope
  easily led astray;—these they mingled with irrational sense and
  with all-daring love according to necessary laws, and so framed
  man. Wherefore, fearing to pollute the divine any more than was
  absolutely unavoidable, they gave to the mortal nature a separate
  habitation in another part of the body, placing the neck between
  them to be the isthmus and boundary, which they constructed
  between the head and breast, to keep them apart. And in the
  breast, and in what is termed the thorax, they encased the mortal
  soul; and as the one part of this was superior and the other
  inferior they divided the cavity of the thorax into two parts, as
  the women’s and men’s apartments are divided in houses, and
  placed the midriff to be a wall of partition between them. That
  part of the inferior soul which is endowed with courage and
  passion and loves contention they settled nearer the head, midway
  between the midriff and the neck, in order that it might be under
  the rule of reason and might join with it in controlling and
  restraining the desires when they are no longer willing of their
  own accord to obey the word of command issuing from the citadel.

  The heart, the knot of the veins and the fountain of the blood
  which races through all the limbs, was set in the place of guard,
  that when the might of passion was roused by reason making
  proclamation of any wrong assailing them from without or being
  perpetrated by the desires within, quickly the whole power of
  feeling in the body, perceiving these commands and threats, might
  obey and follow through every turn and alley, and thus allow the
  principle of the best to have the command in all of them. But the
  gods, foreknowing that the palpitation of the heart in the
  expectation of danger and the swelling and excitement of passion
  was caused by fire, formed and implanted as a supporter to the
  heart the lung, which was, in the first place, soft and
  bloodless, and also had within hollows like the pores of a
  sponge, in order that by receiving the breath and the drink, it
  might give coolness and the power of respiration and alleviate
  the heat. Wherefore they cut the air-channels leading to the
  lung, and placed the lung about the heart as a soft spring, that,
  when passion was rife within, the heart, beating against a
  yielding body, might be cooled and suffer less, and might thus
  become more ready to join with passion in the service of reason.

  The part of the soul which desires meats and drinks and the other
  things of which it has need by reason of the bodily nature, they
  placed between the midriff and the boundary of the navel,
  contriving in all this region a sort of manger for the food of
  the body; and there they bound it down like a wild animal which
  was chained up with man, and must be nourished if man was to
  exist. They appointed this lower creation his place here in order
  that he might be always feeding at the manger, and have his
  dwelling as far as might be from the council-chamber, making as
  little noise and disturbance as possible, and permitting the best
  part to advise quietly for the good of the whole. And knowing
  that this lower principle in man would not comprehend reason, and
  even if attaining to some degree of perception would never
  naturally care for rational notions, but that it would be led
  away by phantoms and visions night and day,—to be a remedy for
  this, God combined with it the liver, and placed it in the house
  of the lower nature, contriving that it should be solid and
  smooth, and bright and sweet, and should also have a bitter
  quality, in order that the power of thought, which proceeds from
  the mind, might be reflected as in a mirror which receives
  likenesses of objects and gives back images of them to the sight;
  and so might strike terror into the desires, when, making use of
  the bitter part of the liver, to which it is akin, it comes
  threatening and invading, and diffusing this bitter element
  swiftly through the whole liver produces colours like bile, and
  contracting every part makes it wrinkled and rough; and twisting
  out of its right place and contorting the lobe and closing and
  shutting up the vessels and gates, causes pain and loathing. And
  the converse happens when some gentle inspiration of the
  understanding pictures images of an opposite character, and
  allays the bile and bitterness by refusing to stir or touch the
  nature opposed to itself, but by making use of the natural
  sweetness of the liver, corrects all things and makes them to be
  right and smooth and free, and renders the portion of the soul
  which resides about the liver happy and joyful, enabling it to
  pass the night in peace, and to practise divination in sleep,
  inasmuch as it has no share in mind and reason. For the authors
  of our being, remembering the command of their father when he
  bade them create the human race as good as they could, that they
  might correct our inferior parts and make them to attain a
  measure of truth, placed in the liver the seat of divination. And
  herein is a proof that God has given the art of divination not to
  the wisdom, but to the foolishness of man. No man, when in his
  wits, attains prophetic truth and inspiration; but when he
  receives the inspired word, either his intelligence is enthralled
  in sleep, or he is demented by some distemper or possession. And
  he who would understand what he remembers to have been said,
  whether in a dream or when he was awake, by the prophetic and
  inspired nature, or would determine by reason the meaning of the
  apparitions which he has seen, and what indications they afford
  to this man or that, of past, present or future good and evil,
  must first recover his wits. But, while he continues demented, he
  cannot judge of the visions which he sees or the words which he
  utters; the ancient saying is very true, that ‘only a man who has
  his wits can act or judge about himself and his own affairs.’ And
  for this reason it is customary to appoint interpreters to be
  judges of the true inspiration. Some persons call them prophets;
  they are quite unaware that they are only the expositors of dark
  sayings and visions, and are not to be called prophets at all,
  but only interpreters of prophecy.

  Such is the nature of the liver, which is placed as we have
  described in order that it may give prophetic intimations. During
  the life of each individual these intimations are plainer, but
  after his death the liver becomes blind, and delivers oracles too
  obscure to be intelligible. The neighbouring organ (the spleen)
  is situated on the left-hand side, and is constructed with a view
  of keeping the liver bright and pure,—like a napkin, always ready
  prepared and at hand to clean the mirror. And hence, when any
  impurities arise in the region of the liver by reason of
  disorders of the body, the loose nature of the spleen, which is
  composed of a hollow and bloodless tissue, receives them all and
  clears them away, and when filled with the unclean matter, swells
  and festers, but, again, when the body is purged, settles down
  into the same place as before, and is humbled.

  Concerning the soul, as to which part is mortal and which divine,
  and how and why they are separated, and where located, if God
  acknowledges that we have spoken the truth, then, and then only,
  can we be confident; still, we may venture to assert that what
  has been said by us is probable, and will be rendered more
  probable by investigation. Let us assume thus much.

  The creation of the rest of the body follows next in order, and
  this we may investigate in a similar manner. And it appears to be
  very meet that the body should be framed on the following
  principles:—

  The authors of our race were aware that we should be intemperate
  in eating and drinking, and take a good deal more than was
  necessary or proper, by reason of gluttony. In order then that
  disease might not quickly destroy us, and lest our mortal race
  should perish without fulfilling its end—intending to provide
  against this, the gods made what is called the lower belly, to be
  a receptacle for the superfluous meat and drink, and formed the
  convolution of the bowels, so that the food might be prevented
  from passing quickly through and compelling the body to require
  more food, thus producing insatiable gluttony, and making the
  whole race an enemy to philosophy and music, and rebellious
  against the divinest element within us.

  The bones and flesh, and other similar parts of us, were made as
  follows. The first principle of all of them was the generation of
  the marrow. For the bonds of life which unite the soul with the
  body are made fast there, and they are the root and foundation of
  the human race. The marrow itself is created out of other
  materials: God took such of the primary triangles as were
  straight and smooth, and were adapted by their perfection to
  produce fire and water, and air and earth—these, I say, he
  separated from their kinds, and mingling them in due proportions
  with one another, made the marrow out of them to be a universal
  seed of the whole race of mankind; and in this seed he then
  planted and enclosed the souls, and in the original distribution
  gave to the marrow as many and various forms as the different
  kinds of souls were hereafter to receive. That which, like a
  field, was to receive the divine seed, he made round every way,
  and called that portion of the marrow, brain, intending that,
  when an animal was perfected, the vessel containing this
  substance should be the head; but that which was intended to
  contain the remaining and mortal part of the soul he distributed
  into figures at once round and elongated, and he called them all
  by the name ‘marrow’; and to these, as to anchors, fastening the
  bonds of the whole soul, he proceeded to fashion around them the
  entire framework of our body, constructing for the marrow, first
  of all a complete covering of bone.

  Bone was composed by him in the following manner. Having sifted
  pure and smooth earth he kneaded it and wetted it with marrow,
  and after that he put it into fire and then into water, and once
  more into fire and again into water—in this way by frequent
  transfers from one to the other he made it insoluble by either.
  Out of this he fashioned, as in a lathe, a globe made of bone,
  which he placed around the brain, and in this he left a narrow
  opening; and around the marrow of the neck and back he formed
  vertebrae which he placed under one another like pivots,
  beginning at the head and extending through the whole of the
  trunk. Thus wishing to preserve the entire seed, he enclosed it
  in a stone-like casing, inserting joints, and using in the
  formation of them the power of the other or diverse as an
  intermediate nature, that they might have motion and flexure.
  Then again, considering that the bone would be too brittle and
  inflexible, and when heated and again cooled would soon mortify
  and destroy the seed within—having this in view, he contrived the
  sinews and the flesh, that so binding all the members together by
  the sinews, which admitted of being stretched and relaxed about
  the vertebrae, he might thus make the body capable of flexion and
  extension, while the flesh would serve as a protection against
  the summer heat and against the winter cold, and also against
  falls, softly and easily yielding to external bodies, like
  articles made of felt; and containing in itself a warm moisture
  which in summer exudes and makes the surface damp, would impart a
  natural coolness to the whole body; and again in winter by the
  help of this internal warmth would form a very tolerable defence
  against the frost which surrounds it and attacks it from without.
  He who modelled us, considering these things, mixed earth with
  fire and water and blended them; and making a ferment of acid and
  salt, he mingled it with them and formed soft and succulent
  flesh. As for the sinews, he made them of a mixture of bone and
  unfermented flesh, attempered so as to be in a mean, and gave
  them a yellow colour; wherefore the sinews have a firmer and more
  glutinous nature than flesh, but a softer and moister nature than
  the bones. With these God covered the bones and marrow, binding
  them together by sinews, and then enshrouded them all in an upper
  covering of flesh. The more living and sensitive of the bones he
  enclosed in the thinnest film of flesh, and those which had the
  least life within them in the thickest and most solid flesh. So
  again on the joints of the bones, where reason indicated that no
  more was required, he placed only a thin covering of flesh, that
  it might not interfere with the flexion of our bodies and make
  them unwieldy because difficult to move; and also that it might
  not, by being crowded and pressed and matted together, destroy
  sensation by reason of its hardness, and impair the memory and
  dull the edge of intelligence. Wherefore also the thighs and the
  shanks and the hips, and the bones of the arms and the forearms,
  and other parts which have no joints, and the inner bones, which
  on account of the rarity of the soul in the marrow are destitute
  of reason—all these are abundantly provided with flesh; but such
  as have mind in them are in general less fleshy, except where the
  creator has made some part solely of flesh in order to give
  sensation,—as, for example, the tongue. But commonly this is not
  the case. For the nature which comes into being and grows up in
  us by a law of necessity, does not admit of the combination of
  solid bone and much flesh with acute perceptions. More than any
  other part the framework of the head would have had them, if they
  could have co-existed, and the human race, having a strong and
  fleshy and sinewy head, would have had a life twice or many times
  as long as it now has, and also more healthy and free from pain.
  But our creators, considering whether they should make a
  longer-lived race which was worse, or a shorter-lived race which
  was better, came to the conclusion that every one ought to prefer
  a shorter span of life, which was better, to a longer one, which
  was worse; and therefore they covered the head with thin bone,
  but not with flesh and sinews, since it had no joints; and thus
  the head was added, having more wisdom and sensation than the
  rest of the body, but also being in every man far weaker. For
  these reasons and after this manner God placed the sinews at the
  extremity of the head, in a circle round the neck, and glued them
  together by the principle of likeness and fastened the
  extremities of the jawbones to them below the face, and the other
  sinews he dispersed throughout the body, fastening limb to limb.
  The framers of us framed the mouth, as now arranged, having teeth
  and tongue and lips, with a view to the necessary and the good
  contriving the way in for necessary purposes, the way out for the
  best purposes; for that is necessary which enters in and gives
  food to the body; but the river of speech, which flows out of a
  man and ministers to the intelligence, is the fairest and noblest
  of all streams. Still the head could neither be left a bare frame
  of bones, on account of the extremes of heat and cold in the
  different seasons, nor yet be allowed to be wholly covered, and
  so become dull and senseless by reason of an overgrowth of flesh.
  The fleshy nature was not therefore wholly dried up, but a large
  sort of peel was parted off and remained over, which is now
  called the skin. This met and grew by the help of the cerebral
  moisture, and became the circular envelopment of the head. And
  the moisture, rising up under the sutures, watered and closed in
  the skin upon the crown, forming a sort of knot. The diversity of
  the sutures was caused by the power of the courses of the soul
  and of the food, and the more these struggled against one another
  the more numerous they became, and fewer if the struggle were
  less violent. This skin the divine power pierced all round with
  fire, and out of the punctures which were thus made the moisture
  issued forth, and the liquid and heat which was pure came away,
  and a mixed part which was composed of the same material as the
  skin, and had a fineness equal to the punctures, was borne up by
  its own impulse and extended far outside the head, but being too
  slow to escape, was thrust back by the external air, and rolled
  up underneath the skin, where it took root. Thus the hair sprang
  up in the skin, being akin to it because it is like threads of
  leather, but rendered harder and closer through the pressure of
  the cold, by which each hair, while in process of separation from
  the skin, is compressed and cooled. Wherefore the creator formed
  the head hairy, making use of the causes which I have mentioned,
  and reflecting also that instead of flesh the brain needed the
  hair to be a light covering or guard, which would give shade in
  summer and shelter in winter, and at the same time would not
  impede our quickness of perception. From the combination of
  sinew, skin, and bone, in the structure of the finger, there
  arises a triple compound, which, when dried up, takes the form of
  one hard skin partaking of all three natures, and was fabricated
  by these second causes, but designed by mind which is the
  principal cause with an eye to the future. For our creators well
  knew that women and other animals would some day be framed out of
  men, and they further knew that many animals would require the
  use of nails for many purposes; wherefore they fashioned in men
  at their first creation the rudiments of nails. For this purpose
  and for these reasons they caused skin, hair, and nails to grow
  at the extremities of the limbs.

  And now that all the parts and members of the mortal animal had
  come together, since its life of necessity consisted of fire and
  breath, and it therefore wasted away by dissolution and
  depletion, the gods contrived the following remedy: They mingled
  a nature akin to that of man with other forms and perceptions,
  and thus created another kind of animal. These are the trees and
  plants and seeds which have been improved by cultivation and are
  now domesticated among us; anciently there were only the wild
  kinds, which are older than the cultivated. For everything that
  partakes of life may be truly called a living being, and the
  animal of which we are now speaking partakes of the third kind of
  soul, which is said to be seated between the midriff and the
  navel, having no part in opinion or reason or mind, but only in
  feelings of pleasure and pain and the desires which accompany
  them. For this nature is always in a passive state, revolving in
  and about itself, repelling the motion from without and using its
  own, and accordingly is not endowed by nature with the power of
  observing or reflecting on its own concerns. Wherefore it lives
  and does not differ from a living being, but is fixed and rooted
  in the same spot, having no power of self-motion.

  Now after the superior powers had created all these natures to be
  food for us who are of the inferior nature, they cut various
  channels through the body as through a garden, that it might be
  watered as from a running stream. In the first place, they cut
  two hidden channels or veins down the back where the skin and the
  flesh join, which answered severally to the right and left side
  of the body. These they let down along the backbone, so as to
  have the marrow of generation between them, where it was most
  likely to flourish, and in order that the stream coming down from
  above might flow freely to the other parts, and equalize the
  irrigation. In the next place, they divided the veins about the
  head, and interlacing them, they sent them in opposite
  directions; those coming from the right side they sent to the
  left of the body, and those from the left they diverted towards
  the right, so that they and the skin might together form a bond
  which should fasten the head to the body, since the crown of the
  head was not encircled by sinews; and also in order that the
  sensations from both sides might be distributed over the whole
  body. And next, they ordered the water-courses of the body in a
  manner which I will describe, and which will be more easily
  understood if we begin by admitting that all things which have
  lesser parts retain the greater, but the greater cannot retain
  the lesser. Now of all natures fire has the smallest parts, and
  therefore penetrates through earth and water and air and their
  compounds, nor can anything hold it. And a similar principle
  applies to the human belly; for when meats and drinks enter it,
  it holds them, but it cannot hold air and fire, because the
  particles of which they consist are smaller than its own
  structure.

  These elements, therefore, God employed for the sake of
  distributing moisture from the belly into the veins, weaving
  together a network of fire and air like a weel, having at the
  entrance two lesser weels; further he constructed one of these
  with two openings, and from the lesser weels he extended cords
  reaching all round to the extremities of the network. All the
  interior of the net he made of fire, but the lesser weels and
  their cavity, of air. The network he took and spread over the
  newly-formed animal in the following manner:—He let the lesser
  weels pass into the mouth; there were two of them, and one he let
  down by the air-pipes into the lungs, the other by the side of
  the air-pipes into the belly. The former he divided into two
  branches, both of which he made to meet at the channels of the
  nose, so that when the way through the mouth did not act, the
  streams of the mouth as well were replenished through the nose.
  With the other cavity (i.e. of the greater weel) he enveloped the
  hollow parts of the body, and at one time he made all this to
  flow into the lesser weels, quite gently, for they are composed
  of air, and at another time he caused the lesser weels to flow
  back again; and the net he made to find a way in and out through
  the pores of the body, and the rays of fire which are bound fast
  within followed the passage of the air either way, never at any
  time ceasing so long as the mortal being holds together. This
  process, as we affirm, the name-giver named inspiration and
  expiration. And all this movement, active as well as passive,
  takes place in order that the body, being watered and cooled, may
  receive nourishment and life; for when the respiration is going
  in and out, and the fire, which is fast bound within, follows it,
  and ever and anon moving to and fro, enters through the belly and
  reaches the meat and drink, it dissolves them, and dividing them
  into small portions and guiding them through the passages where
  it goes, pumps them as from a fountain into the channels of the
  veins, and makes the stream of the veins flow through the body as
  through a conduit.

  Let us once more consider the phenomena of respiration, and
  enquire into the causes which have made it what it is. They are
  as follows:—Seeing that there is no such thing as a vacuum into
  which any of those things which are moved can enter, and the
  breath is carried from us into the external air, the next point
  is, as will be clear to every one, that it does not go into a
  vacant space, but pushes its neighbour out of its place, and that
  which is thrust out in turn drives out its neighbour; and in this
  way everything of necessity at last comes round to that place
  from whence the breath came forth, and enters in there, and
  following the breath, fills up the vacant space; and this goes on
  like the rotation of a wheel, because there can be no such thing
  as a vacuum. Wherefore also the breast and the lungs, when they
  emit the breath, are replenished by the air which surrounds the
  body and which enters in through the pores of the flesh and is
  driven round in a circle; and again, the air which is sent away
  and passes out through the body forces the breath inwards through
  the passage of the mouth and the nostrils. Now the origin of this
  movement may be supposed to be as follows. In the interior of
  every animal the hottest part is that which is around the blood
  and veins; it is in a manner an internal fountain of fire, which
  we compare to the network of a creel, being woven all of fire and
  extended through the centre of the body, while the outer parts
  are composed of air. Now we must admit that heat naturally
  proceeds outward to its own place and to its kindred element; and
  as there are two exits for the heat, the one out through the
  body, and the other through the mouth and nostrils, when it moves
  towards the one, it drives round the air at the other, and that
  which is driven round falls into the fire and becomes warm, and
  that which goes forth is cooled. But when the heat changes its
  place, and the particles at the other exit grow warmer, the
  hotter air inclining in that direction and carried towards its
  native element, fire, pushes round the air at the other; and this
  being affected in the same way and communicating the same
  impulse, a circular motion swaying to and fro is produced by the
  double process, which we call inspiration and expiration.

  The phenomena of medical cupping-glasses and of the swallowing of
  drink and of the projection of bodies, whether discharged in the
  air or bowled along the ground, are to be investigated on a
  similar principle; and swift and slow sounds, which appear to be
  high and low, and are sometimes discordant on account of their
  inequality, and then again harmonical on account of the equality
  of the motion which they excite in us. For when the motions of
  the antecedent swifter sounds begin to pause and the two are
  equalized, the slower sounds overtake the swifter and then propel
  them. When they overtake them they do not intrude a new and
  discordant motion, but introduce the beginnings of a slower,
  which answers to the swifter as it dies away, thus producing a
  single mixed expression out of high and low, whence arises a
  pleasure which even the unwise feel, and which to the wise
  becomes a higher sort of delight, being an imitation of divine
  harmony in mortal motions. Moreover, as to the flowing of water,
  the fall of the thunderbolt, and the marvels that are observed
  about the attraction of amber and the Heraclean stones,—in none
  of these cases is there any attraction; but he who investigates
  rightly, will find that such wonderful phenomena are attributable
  to the combination of certain conditions—the non-existence of a
  vacuum, the fact that objects push one another round, and that
  they change places, passing severally into their proper positions
  as they are divided or combined.

  Such as we have seen, is the nature and such are the causes of
  respiration,—the subject in which this discussion originated. For
  the fire cuts the food and following the breath surges up within,
  fire and breath rising together and filling the veins by drawing
  up out of the belly and pouring into them the cut portions of the
  food; and so the streams of food are kept flowing through the
  whole body in all animals. And fresh cuttings from kindred
  substances, whether the fruits of the earth or herb of the field,
  which God planted to be our daily food, acquire all sorts of
  colours by their inter-mixture; but red is the most pervading of
  them, being created by the cutting action of fire and by the
  impression which it makes on a moist substance; and hence the
  liquid which circulates in the body has a colour such as we have
  described. The liquid itself we call blood, which nourishes the
  flesh and the whole body, whence all parts are watered and empty
  places filled.

  Now the process of repletion and evacuation is effected after the
  manner of the universal motion by which all kindred substances
  are drawn towards one another. For the external elements which
  surround us are always causing us to consume away, and
  distributing and sending off like to like; the particles of
  blood, too, which are divided and contained within the frame of
  the animal as in a sort of heaven, are compelled to imitate the
  motion of the universe. Each, therefore, of the divided parts
  within us, being carried to its kindred nature, replenishes the
  void. When more is taken away than flows in, then we decay, and
  when less, we grow and increase.

  The frame of the entire creature when young has the triangles of
  each kind new, and may be compared to the keel of a vessel which
  is just off the stocks; they are locked firmly together and yet
  the whole mass is soft and delicate, being freshly formed of
  marrow and nurtured on milk. Now when the triangles out of which
  meats and drinks are composed come in from without, and are
  comprehended in the body, being older and weaker than the
  triangles already there, the frame of the body gets the better of
  them and its newer triangles cut them up, and so the animal grows
  great, being nourished by a multitude of similar particles. But
  when the roots of the triangles are loosened by having undergone
  many conflicts with many things in the course of time, they are
  no longer able to cut or assimilate the food which enters, but
  are themselves easily divided by the bodies which come in from
  without. In this way every animal is overcome and decays, and
  this affection is called old age. And at last, when the bonds by
  which the triangles of the marrow are united no longer hold, and
  are parted by the strain of existence, they in turn loosen the
  bonds of the soul, and she, obtaining a natural release, flies
  away with joy. For that which takes place according to nature is
  pleasant, but that which is contrary to nature is painful. And
  thus death, if caused by disease or produced by wounds, is
  painful and violent; but that sort of death which comes with old
  age and fulfils the debt of nature is the easiest of deaths, and
  is accompanied with pleasure rather than with pain.

  Now every one can see whence diseases arise. There are four
  natures out of which the body is compacted, earth and fire and
  water and air, and the unnatural excess or defect of these, or
  the change of any of them from its own natural place into
  another, or—since there are more kinds than one of fire and of
  the other elements—the assumption by any of these of a wrong
  kind, or any similar irregularity, produces disorders and
  diseases; for when any of them is produced or changed in a manner
  contrary to nature, the parts which were previously cool grow
  warm, and those which were dry become moist, and the light become
  heavy, and the heavy light; all sorts of changes occur. For, as
  we affirm, a thing can only remain the same with itself, whole
  and sound, when the same is added to it, or subtracted from it,
  in the same respect and in the same manner and in due proportion;
  and whatever comes or goes away in violation of these laws causes
  all manner of changes and infinite diseases and corruptions. Now
  there is a second class of structures which are also natural, and
  this affords a second opportunity of observing diseases to him
  who would understand them. For whereas marrow and bone and flesh
  and sinews are composed of the four elements, and the blood,
  though after another manner, is likewise formed out of them, most
  diseases originate in the way which I have described; but the
  worst of all owe their severity to the fact that the generation
  of these substances proceeds in a wrong order; they are then
  destroyed. For the natural order is that the flesh and sinews
  should be made of blood, the sinews out of the fibres to which
  they are akin, and the flesh out of the clots which are formed
  when the fibres are separated. And the glutinous and rich matter
  which comes away from the sinews and the flesh, not only glues
  the flesh to the bones, but nourishes and imparts growth to the
  bone which surrounds the marrow; and by reason of the solidity of
  the bones, that which filters through consists of the purest and
  smoothest and oiliest sort of triangles, dropping like dew from
  the bones and watering the marrow. Now when each process takes
  place in this order, health commonly results; when in the
  opposite order, disease. For when the flesh becomes decomposed
  and sends back the wasting substance into the veins, then an
  over-supply of blood of diverse kinds, mingling with air in the
  veins, having variegated colours and bitter properties, as well
  as acid and saline qualities, contains all sorts of bile and
  serum and phlegm. For all things go the wrong way, and having
  become corrupted, first they taint the blood itself, and then
  ceasing to give nourishment to the body they are carried along
  the veins in all directions, no longer preserving the order of
  their natural courses, but at war with themselves, because they
  receive no good from one another, and are hostile to the abiding
  constitution of the body, which they corrupt and dissolve. The
  oldest part of the flesh which is corrupted, being hard to
  decompose, from long burning grows black, and from being
  everywhere corroded becomes bitter, and is injurious to every
  part of the body which is still uncorrupted. Sometimes, when the
  bitter element is refined away, the black part assumes an acidity
  which takes the place of the bitterness; at other times the
  bitterness being tinged with blood has a redder colour; and this,
  when mixed with black, takes the hue of grass; and again, an
  auburn colour mingles with the bitter matter when new flesh is
  decomposed by the fire which surrounds the internal flame;—to all
  which symptoms some physician perhaps, or rather some
  philosopher, who had the power of seeing in many dissimilar
  things one nature deserving of a name, has assigned the common
  name of bile. But the other kinds of bile are variously
  distinguished by their colours. As for serum, that sort which is
  the watery part of blood is innocent, but that which is a
  secretion of black and acid bile is malignant when mingled by the
  power of heat with any salt substance, and is then called acid
  phlegm. Again, the substance which is formed by the liquefaction
  of new and tender flesh when air is present, if inflated and
  encased in liquid so as to form bubbles, which separately are
  invisible owing to their small size, but when collected are of a
  bulk which is visible, and have a white colour arising out of the
  generation of foam—all this decomposition of tender flesh when
  intermingled with air is termed by us white phlegm. And the whey
  or sediment of newly-formed phlegm is sweat and tears, and
  includes the various daily discharges by which the body is
  purified. Now all these become causes of disease when the blood
  is not replenished in a natural manner by food and drink but
  gains bulk from opposite sources in violation of the laws of
  nature. When the several parts of the flesh are separated by
  disease, if the foundation remains, the power of the disorder is
  only half as great, and there is still a prospect of an easy
  recovery; but when that which binds the flesh to the bones is
  diseased, and no longer being separated from the muscles and
  sinews, ceases to give nourishment to the bone and to unite flesh
  and bone, and from being oily and smooth and glutinous becomes
  rough and salt and dry, owing to bad regimen, then all the
  substance thus corrupted crumbles away under the flesh and the
  sinews, and separates from the bone, and the fleshy parts fall
  away from their foundation and leave the sinews bare and full of
  brine, and the flesh again gets into the circulation of the blood
  and makes the previously-mentioned disorders still greater. And
  if these bodily affections be severe, still worse are the prior
  disorders; as when the bone itself, by reason of the density of
  the flesh, does not obtain sufficient air, but becomes mouldy and
  hot and gangrened and receives no nutriment, and the natural
  process is inverted, and the bone crumbling passes into the food,
  and the food into the flesh, and the flesh again falling into the
  blood makes all maladies that may occur more virulent than those
  already mentioned. But the worst case of all is when the marrow
  is diseased, either from excess or defect; and this is the cause
  of the very greatest and most fatal disorders, in which the whole
  course of the body is reversed.

  There is a third class of diseases which may be conceived of as
  arising in three ways; for they are produced sometimes by wind,
  and sometimes by phlegm, and sometimes by bile. When the lung,
  which is the dispenser of the air to the body, is obstructed by
  rheums and its passages are not free, some of them not acting,
  while through others too much air enters, then the parts which
  are unrefreshed by air corrode, while in other parts the excess
  of air forcing its way through the veins distorts them and
  decomposing the body is enclosed in the midst of it and occupies
  the midriff; thus numberless painful diseases are produced,
  accompanied by copious sweats. And oftentimes when the flesh is
  dissolved in the body, wind, generated within and unable to
  escape, is the source of quite as much pain as the air coming in
  from without; but the greatest pain is felt when the wind gets
  about the sinews and the veins of the shoulders, and swells them
  up, and so twists back the great tendons and the sinews which are
  connected with them. These disorders are called tetanus and
  opisthotonus, by reason of the tension which accompanies them.
  The cure of them is difficult; relief is in most cases given by
  fever supervening. The white phlegm, though dangerous when
  detained within by reason of the air-bubbles, yet if it can
  communicate with the outside air, is less severe, and only
  discolours the body, generating leprous eruptions and similar
  diseases. When it is mingled with black bile and dispersed about
  the courses of the head, which are the divinest part of us, the
  attack if coming on in sleep, is not so severe; but when
  assailing those who are awake it is hard to be got rid of, and
  being an affection of a sacred part, is most justly called
  sacred. An acid and salt phlegm, again, is the source of all
  those diseases which take the form of catarrh, but they have many
  names because the places into which they flow are manifold.

  Inflammations of the body come from burnings and inflamings, and
  all of them originate in bile. When bile finds a means of
  discharge, it boils up and sends forth all sorts of tumours; but
  when imprisoned within, it generates many inflammatory diseases,
  above all when mingled with pure blood; since it then displaces
  the fibres which are scattered about in the blood and are
  designed to maintain the balance of rare and dense, in order that
  the blood may not be so liquefied by heat as to exude from the
  pores of the body, nor again become too dense and thus find a
  difficulty in circulating through the veins. The fibres are so
  constituted as to maintain this balance; and if any one brings
  them all together when the blood is dead and in process of
  cooling, then the blood which remains becomes fluid, but if they
  are left alone, they soon congeal by reason of the surrounding
  cold. The fibres having this power over the blood, bile, which is
  only stale blood, and which from being flesh is dissolved again
  into blood, at the first influx coming in little by little, hot
  and liquid, is congealed by the power of the fibres; and so
  congealing and made to cool, it produces internal cold and
  shuddering. When it enters with more of a flood and overcomes the
  fibres by its heat, and boiling up throws them into disorder, if
  it have power enough to maintain its supremacy, it penetrates the
  marrow and burns up what may be termed the cables of the soul,
  and sets her free; but when there is not so much of it, and the
  body though wasted still holds out, the bile is itself mastered,
  and is either utterly banished, or is thrust through the veins
  into the lower or upper belly, and is driven out of the body like
  an exile from a state in which there has been civil war; whence
  arise diarrhoeas and dysenteries, and all such disorders. When
  the constitution is disordered by excess of fire, continuous heat
  and fever are the result; when excess of air is the cause, then
  the fever is quotidian; when of water, which is a more sluggish
  element than either fire or air, then the fever is a tertian;
  when of earth, which is the most sluggish of the four, and is
  only purged away in a four-fold period, the result is a quartan
  fever, which can with difficulty be shaken off.

  Such is the manner in which diseases of the body arise; the
  disorders of the soul, which depend upon the body, originate as
  follows. We must acknowledge disease of the mind to be a want of
  intelligence; and of this there are two kinds; to wit, madness
  and ignorance. In whatever state a man experiences either of
  them, that state may be called disease; and excessive pains and
  pleasures are justly to be regarded as the greatest diseases to
  which the soul is liable. For a man who is in great joy or in
  great pain, in his unreasonable eagerness to attain the one and
  to avoid the other, is not able to see or to hear anything
  rightly; but he is mad, and is at the time utterly incapable of
  any participation in reason. He who has the seed about the spinal
  marrow too plentiful and overflowing, like a tree overladen with
  fruit, has many throes, and also obtains many pleasures in his
  desires and their offspring, and is for the most part of his life
  deranged, because his pleasures and pains are so very great; his
  soul is rendered foolish and disordered by his body; yet he is
  regarded not as one diseased, but as one who is voluntarily bad,
  which is a mistake. The truth is that the intemperance of love is
  a disease of the soul due chiefly to the moisture and fluidity
  which is produced in one of the elements by the loose consistency
  of the bones. And in general, all that which is termed the
  incontinence of pleasure and is deemed a reproach under the idea
  that the wicked voluntarily do wrong is not justly a matter for
  reproach. For no man is voluntarily bad; but the bad become bad
  by reason of an ill disposition of the body and bad education,
  things which are hateful to every man and happen to him against
  his will. And in the case of pain too in like manner the soul
  suffers much evil from the body. For where the acid and briny
  phlegm and other bitter and bilious humours wander about in the
  body, and find no exit or escape, but are pent up within and
  mingle their own vapours with the motions of the soul, and are
  blended with them, they produce all sorts of diseases, more or
  fewer, and in every degree of intensity; and being carried to the
  three places of the soul, whichever they may severally assail,
  they create infinite varieties of ill-temper and melancholy, of
  rashness and cowardice, and also of forgetfulness and stupidity.
  Further, when to this evil constitution of body evil forms of
  government are added and evil discourses are uttered in private
  as well as in public, and no sort of instruction is given in
  youth to cure these evils, then all of us who are bad become bad
  from two causes which are entirely beyond our control. In such
  cases the planters are to blame rather than the plants, the
  educators rather than the educated. But however that may be, we
  should endeavour as far as we can by education, and studies, and
  learning, to avoid vice and attain virtue; this, however, is part
  of another subject.

  There is a corresponding enquiry concerning the mode of treatment
  by which the mind and the body are to be preserved, about which
  it is meet and right that I should say a word in turn; for it is
  more our duty to speak of the good than of the evil. Everything
  that is good is fair, and the fair is not without proportion, and
  the animal which is to be fair must have due proportion. Now we
  perceive lesser symmetries or proportions and reason about them,
  but of the highest and greatest we take no heed; for there is no
  proportion or disproportion more productive of health and
  disease, and virtue and vice, than that between soul and body.
  This however we do not perceive, nor do we reflect that when a
  weak or small frame is the vehicle of a great and mighty soul, or
  conversely, when a little soul is encased in a large body, then
  the whole animal is not fair, for it lacks the most important of
  all symmetries; but the due proportion of mind and body is the
  fairest and loveliest of all sights to him who has the seeing
  eye. Just as a body which has a leg too long, or which is
  unsymmetrical in some other respect, is an unpleasant sight, and
  also, when doing its share of work, is much distressed and makes
  convulsive efforts, and often stumbles through awkwardness, and
  is the cause of infinite evil to its own self—in like manner we
  should conceive of the double nature which we call the living
  being; and when in this compound there is an impassioned soul
  more powerful than the body, that soul, I say, convulses and
  fills with disorders the whole inner nature of man; and when
  eager in the pursuit of some sort of learning or study, causes
  wasting; or again, when teaching or disputing in private or in
  public, and strifes and controversies arise, inflames and
  dissolves the composite frame of man and introduces rheums; and
  the nature of this phenomenon is not understood by most
  professors of medicine, who ascribe it to the opposite of the
  real cause. And once more, when a body large and too strong for
  the soul is united to a small and weak intelligence, then
  inasmuch as there are two desires natural to man,—one of food for
  the sake of the body, and one of wisdom for the sake of the
  diviner part of us—then, I say, the motions of the stronger,
  getting the better and increasing their own power, but making the
  soul dull, and stupid, and forgetful, engender ignorance, which
  is the greatest of diseases. There is one protection against both
  kinds of disproportion:—that we should not move the body without
  the soul or the soul without the body, and thus they will be on
  their guard against each other, and be healthy and well balanced.
  And therefore the mathematician or any one else whose thoughts
  are much absorbed in some intellectual pursuit, must allow his
  body also to have due exercise, and practise gymnastic; and he
  who is careful to fashion the body, should in turn impart to the
  soul its proper motions, and should cultivate music and all
  philosophy, if he would deserve to be called truly fair and truly
  good. And the separate parts should be treated in the same
  manner, in imitation of the pattern of the universe; for as the
  body is heated and also cooled within by the elements which enter
  into it, and is again dried up and moistened by external things,
  and experiences these and the like affections from both kinds of
  motions, the result is that the body if given up to motion when
  in a state of quiescence is overmastered and perishes; but if any
  one, in imitation of that which we call the foster-mother and
  nurse of the universe, will not allow the body ever to be
  inactive, but is always producing motions and agitations through
  its whole extent, which form the natural defence against other
  motions both internal and external, and by moderate exercise
  reduces to order according to their affinities the particles and
  affections which are wandering about the body, as we have already
  said when speaking of the universe, he will not allow enemy
  placed by the side of enemy to stir up wars and disorders in the
  body, but he will place friend by the side of friend, so as to
  create health. Now of all motions that is the best which is
  produced in a thing by itself, for it is most akin to the motion
  of thought and of the universe; but that motion which is caused
  by others is not so good, and worst of all is that which moves
  the body, when at rest, in parts only and by some external
  agency. Wherefore of all modes of purifying and re-uniting the
  body the best is gymnastic; the next best is a surging motion, as
  in sailing or any other mode of conveyance which is not
  fatiguing; the third sort of motion may be of use in a case of
  extreme necessity, but in any other will be adopted by no man of
  sense: I mean the purgative treatment of physicians; for diseases
  unless they are very dangerous should not be irritated by
  medicines, since every form of disease is in a manner akin to the
  living being, whose complex frame has an appointed term of life.
  For not the whole race only, but each individual—barring
  inevitable accidents—comes into the world having a fixed span,
  and the triangles in us are originally framed with power to last
  for a certain time, beyond which no man can prolong his life. And
  this holds also of the constitution of diseases; if any one
  regardless of the appointed time tries to subdue them by
  medicine, he only aggravates and multiplies them. Wherefore we
  ought always to manage them by regimen, as far as a man can spare
  the time, and not provoke a disagreeable enemy by medicines.

  Enough of the composite animal, and of the body which is a part
  of him, and of the manner in which a man may train and be trained
  by himself so as to live most according to reason: and we must
  above and before all provide that the element which is to train
  him shall be the fairest and best adapted to that purpose. A
  minute discussion of this subject would be a serious task; but
  if, as before, I am to give only an outline, the subject may not
  unfitly be summed up as follows.

  I have often remarked that there are three kinds of soul located
  within us, having each of them motions, and I must now repeat in
  the fewest words possible, that one part, if remaining inactive
  and ceasing from its natural motion, must necessarily become very
  weak, but that which is trained and exercised, very strong.
  Wherefore we should take care that the movements of the different
  parts of the soul should be in due proportion.

  And we should consider that God gave the sovereign part of the
  human soul to be the divinity of each one, being that part which,
  as we say, dwells at the top of the body, and inasmuch as we are
  a plant not of an earthly but of a heavenly growth, raises us
  from earth to our kindred who are in heaven. And in this we say
  truly; for the divine power suspended the head and root of us
  from that place where the generation of the soul first began, and
  thus made the whole body upright. When a man is always occupied
  with the cravings of desire and ambition, and is eagerly striving
  to satisfy them, all his thoughts must be mortal, and, as far as
  it is possible altogether to become such, he must be mortal every
  whit, because he has cherished his mortal part. But he who has
  been earnest in the love of knowledge and of true wisdom, and has
  exercised his intellect more than any other part of him, must
  have thoughts immortal and divine, if he attain truth, and in so
  far as human nature is capable of sharing in immortality, he must
  altogether be immortal; and since he is ever cherishing the
  divine power, and has the divinity within him in perfect order,
  he will be perfectly happy. Now there is only one way of taking
  care of things, and this is to give to each the food and motion
  which are natural to it. And the motions which are naturally akin
  to the divine principle within us are the thoughts and
  revolutions of the universe. These each man should follow, and
  correct the courses of the head which were corrupted at our
  birth, and by learning the harmonies and revolutions of the
  universe, should assimilate the thinking being to the thought,
  renewing his original nature, and having assimilated them should
  attain to that perfect life which the gods have set before
  mankind, both for the present and the future.

  Thus our original design of discoursing about the universe down
  to the creation of man is nearly completed. A brief mention may
  be made of the generation of other animals, so far as the subject
  admits of brevity; in this manner our argument will best attain a
  due proportion. On the subject of animals, then, the following
  remarks may be offered. Of the men who came into the world, those
  who were cowards or led unrighteous lives may with reason be
  supposed to have changed into the nature of women in the second
  generation. And this was the reason why at that time the gods
  created in us the desire of sexual intercourse, contriving in man
  one animated substance, and in woman another, which they formed
  respectively in the following manner. The outlet for drink by
  which liquids pass through the lung under the kidneys and into
  the bladder, which receives and then by the pressure of the air
  emits them, was so fashioned by them as to penetrate also into
  the body of the marrow, which passes from the head along the neck
  and through the back, and which in the preceding discourse we
  have named the seed. And the seed having life, and becoming
  endowed with respiration, produces in that part in which it
  respires a lively desire of emission, and thus creates in us the
  love of procreation. Wherefore also in men the organ of
  generation becoming rebellious and masterful, like an animal
  disobedient to reason, and maddened with the sting of lust, seeks
  to gain absolute sway; and the same is the case with the
  so-called womb or matrix of women; the animal within them is
  desirous of procreating children, and when remaining unfruitful
  long beyond its proper time, gets discontented and angry, and
  wandering in every direction through the body, closes up the
  passages of the breath, and, by obstructing respiration, drives
  them to extremity, causing all varieties of disease, until at
  length the desire and love of the man and the woman, bringing
  them together and as it were plucking the fruit from the tree,
  sow in the womb, as in a field, animals unseen by reason of their
  smallness and without form; these again are separated and matured
  within; they are then finally brought out into the light, and
  thus the generation of animals is completed.

  Thus were created women and the female sex in general. But the
  race of birds was created out of innocent light-minded men, who,
  although their minds were directed toward heaven, imagined, in
  their simplicity, that the clearest demonstration of the things
  above was to be obtained by sight; these were remodelled and
  transformed into birds, and they grew feathers instead of hair.
  The race of wild pedestrian animals, again, came from those who
  had no philosophy in any of their thoughts, and never considered
  at all about the nature of the heavens, because they had ceased
  to use the courses of the head, but followed the guidance of
  those parts of the soul which are in the breast. In consequence
  of these habits of theirs they had their front-legs and their
  heads resting upon the earth to which they were drawn by natural
  affinity; and the crowns of their heads were elongated and of all
  sorts of shapes, into which the courses of the soul were crushed
  by reason of disuse. And this was the reason why they were
  created quadrupeds and polypods: God gave the more senseless of
  them the more support that they might be more attracted to the
  earth. And the most foolish of them, who trail their bodies
  entirely upon the ground and have no longer any need of feet, he
  made without feet to crawl upon the earth. The fourth class were
  the inhabitants of the water: these were made out of the most
  entirely senseless and ignorant of all, whom the transformers did
  not think any longer worthy of pure respiration, because they
  possessed a soul which was made impure by all sorts of
  transgression; and instead of the subtle and pure medium of air,
  they gave them the deep and muddy sea to be their element of
  respiration; and hence arose the race of fishes and oysters, and
  other aquatic animals, which have received the most remote
  habitations as a punishment of their outlandish ignorance. These
  are the laws by which animals pass into one another, now, as
  ever, changing as they lose or gain wisdom and folly.

  We may now say that our discourse about the nature of the
  universe has an end. The world has received animals, mortal and
  immortal, and is fulfilled with them, and has become a visible
  animal containing the visible—the sensible God who is the image
  of the intellectual, the greatest, best, fairest, most
  perfect—the one only-begotten heaven.

← previous · Plato · next → · Historical Works